IPS-G-IN-220(1)
FOREWORD
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the
views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum and are
intended for use in the oil and gas production
facilities,
oil
refineries,
chemical
and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing
installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable
standards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are
also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience
acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
the local market availability. The options which
are not specified in the text of the standards are
itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select
his appropriate preferences therein.
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be
sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt
these standards to their requirements. However,
they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS
Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user.
This addendum together with the relevant IPS
shall form the job specification for the specific
project or work.
The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately
every five years. Each standards are subject to
amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the
latest edition of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send
their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the
following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant
technical committee and in case of approval will
be incorporated in the next revision of the
standard.
Standards and Research department
No.19, Street14, North kheradmand
Karimkhan Avenue, Tehran, Iran .
Postal Code- 1585886851
Tel: 88810459-60 & 66153055
Fax: 88810462
Email: Standards@nioc.org
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎر‬
‫( ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﺪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬IPS) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻔﺖ‬
،‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬،‫ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬،‫و ﮔﺎز‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﻓﺮاورش ﮔﺎز و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﺪهﻫﺎﺋﻲ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻧﻔﺖ ﻛﺸﻮر و‬.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاردي‬،‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻻ از ﺑﺎزار داﺧﻠﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﻲ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ آورده ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺪوﻳﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪيﻫﺎي ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص‬.‫ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪ‬.‫آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ آن ﭘﺮوژه و ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﺎص را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داد‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و روزآﻣﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردي ﺣﺬف و ﻳﺎ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﺑﻪ آن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎ و‬،‫از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات اﺻﻼﺣﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد‬
‫ ﻧﻈﺮات و‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ زﻳﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎص ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮدهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات درﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ در ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و در‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ در ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻮﭼﻪ‬،‫ ﺧﺮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬،‫ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻛﺮﻳﻤﺨﺎن زﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻬﺮان‬،‫اﻳﺮان‬
19 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ﭼﻬﺎردﻫﻢ‬
‫ادار ه ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎت و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ‬
1585886851 : ‫ﻛﺪﭘﺴﺘﻲ‬
66153055 ‫ و‬88810459 - 60 : ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
021-88810462 : ‫دور ﻧﮕﺎر‬
Standards@nioc.org
:‫ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
: ‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
GENERAL DEFINITIONS:
Throughout this Standard
definitions shall apply.
the
following
: ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
COMPANY :
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated
companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
such as National Iranian Oil Company, National
Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical
Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And
Distribution Company.
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﮔﺎز اﻳﺮان‬،‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺘﻲ اﻃﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
PURCHASER :
Means the “Company" where this standard is a
part of direct purchaser order by the “Company”,
and the “Contractor” where this Standard is a part
of contract document.
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ آن ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﻗﺮارداد آن اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه و ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
VENDOR AND SUPPLIER:
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or
fabricate the equipment or material.
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم ﺻﻨﻌﺖ را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎر‬
CONTRACTOR:
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose
tender has been accepted by the company.
‫ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدش‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺼﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
: ‫ﻣﺠﺮي‬
EXECUTOR :
Executor is the party which carries out all or part of
construction and/or commissioning for the project.
‫ﻣﺠﺮي ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ اﻃﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ و ﻳﺎ راه اﻧﺪازي ﭘﺮوژه را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎزرس‬
INSPECTOR :
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a
person/persons or a body appointed in writing by
the company for the inspection of fabrication and
installation work
‫ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪاي اﻃﻼق‬/‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎزرس ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
SHALL:
Is used where a provision is mandatory.
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
SHOULD:
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬
WILL:
Is normally used in connection with the action by
the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
supplier or vendor.
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
: ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
MAY:
Is used where
discretionary.
.‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬
a
provision
is
completely
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
ENGINEERING AND INSTALLATION STANDARD
FOR
CONTROL CENTERS
FIRST REVISION
APRIL 2010
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اول‬
1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of
Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither
whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any
third party, reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﻘﻮق آن ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ آن ﺑﻮده و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
،‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬،‫ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ازﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬،‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻳﺎ روش دﻳﮕﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻓﺮاد ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
CONTENTS:
1. SCOPE................................................................ 3
Page
No
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
: ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
3 ...................................................... ‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 3
3 ............................................................. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. UNITS................................................................. 5
5 ............................................................ ‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
4. GENERAL ......................................................... 5
5 ............................................................ ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬-4
5. CONTROL CENTER LOCATION................. 6
6 ............................................... ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-5
5.1 Control Center Size..................................... 6
6 ....................................... ‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬1-5
5.2 Safety Aspects .............................................. 6
6 .......................................... ‫ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬2-5
5.3 Accessibility and Communication ............. 7
7 .................................... ‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ و ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت‬3-5
5.4 Environmental Factors ............................... 8
8 ............................................ ‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬4-5
6. CONTROL CENTER BUILDING
REQUIREMENTS ............................................ 8
8 .............................. ‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-6
6.1 Interior Space Considerations ................... 8
8 .................. ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ‬1-6
6.2 Architectural Considerations ..................... 8
8 ......................................... ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻣﻌﻤﺎري‬2-6
6.3 Internal Environment ................................. 11
11 .............................................. ‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ داﺧﻠﻲ‬3-6
6.4 Hazardous Vapor and Fire Detection System
Requirements................................................ 12
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎز آﺗﺶ و ﺑﺨﺎرات‬4-6
12............................................................‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
6.5 Electrical and Instrumentation
Grounding..................................................... 13
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ و ادوات‬5-6
13 ........................................................ ‫اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬
7. ARRANGEMENT OF CONTROL CENTERS
EQUIPMENT .................................................... 13
13 ............................ ‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-7
7.1 General......................................................... 13
13 ....................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-7
7.2 Control Consoles and Panels..................... 14
14 ........................ ‫ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬2-7
7.3 Consoles Styles............................................ 14
14 ............................... ‫ ﻓﺮم ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬3-7
7.4 Space Considerations ................................. 15
15 .............. ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬4-7
7.5 DCS Installation Consideration ................ 15
15 .....‫ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬DCS ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬5-7
1
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
7.6 Panel Styles .................................................. 16
16 .................................. ‫ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬6-7
7.7 Fire and Gas Detection Systems
(F&G) ............................................................. 17
17 ........ (F&G) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ آﺗﺶ و ﮔﺎز‬7-7
7.8 Instrument Arrangements........................ 20
20 ............................. ‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬8-7
7.9 Space Considerations ................................ 20
20 .............. ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬9-7
7.10 Fabrication................................................. 21
21 ...................................................... ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬10-7
7.11 Electrical Installation................................ 22
22 .................................... ‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬11-7
7.12 Piping.......................................................... 26
26 ................................................. ‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ‬12-7
8.ERGONOMIC DESIGN CONSIDERATION. 28
28 ..... ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬-8
8.1 Shared Visual Displays, Off-Workstation. 28
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي‬1-8
28 ......................................................................‫ﻛﺎري‬
8.2 Horizontal and Vertical Viewing
Distances ....................................................... 28
28 ............................. ‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ دﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ و ﻋﻤﻮدي‬2-8
8.3 Maintenance Access ................................... 31
31 ...................................... ‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ‬3-8
8.4 General Principles for Environmental
Design ........................................................... 33
33 ..................‫ اﺻﻮل ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬4-8
9. PAGING ............................................................. 38
38 ................................................ ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان‬-9
9.1 Operational and System
Characteristics........................................ 38
38 ....................... ‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ‬1-9
9.2. Control Centre Characteristics................. 39
39 .................................. ‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬2-9
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A RECOMMENDATIONS FOR
ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN .... 41
41 .............. ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
APPENDIX B (ANTHROPOMETRIC DATA OF
THE WORLD POPULATION) . 46
46 ....... (‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب )اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺪن در ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺎن‬
2
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آن ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ رود ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ را ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ اﺗﺎق ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ اﺗﺎق وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ و‬،‫ دﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬،(‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ و ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼت دﻳﮕﺮي ﻛﻪ در داﺧﻞ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد راﻫﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻗﺮار دارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ‬
‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻛﻪ از آن ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
، ‫داده و ﻋﻮاﻣﻠﻲ را در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
‫ﺑﻮﻳﮋه آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﺛﺮ ﮔﺬار‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ و ﻧﻴﺰ روﺷﻬﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
IPS-G-IN-250 ‫ ﺑﻪ‬DCS ‫ در ﻣﻮرد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬.‫را اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ " اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
."‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﺪه‬
This Standard covers the Engineering and
Installation of control centers for process
operations. The term control center, as used in
this Standard defines a building which
encompasses the control room with control
panels and other associated control equipment,
auxiliary room, computer equipment room (if
required), associated offices, utility and
mechanical equipment, and any other facilities
housed within the building. The standard covers
guidelines for locating the control center in
reference to the processing units controlled from
it, discusses factors associated with the design
and engineering of the building, primarily those
factors affecting the instrumentation within the
building, and presents common practices for the
construction and installation of the various types
of control panels and auxiliary control
equipment. Regarding DCS requirements,
reference shall be made to IPS-G-IN-250
"Engineering and Construction Standard for
Distributed Control Systems".
:1 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 1:
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬1384 ‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﻣﺮداد ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﻣﻮارد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺻﻼﺣﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ اﺑﻼغ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‬277 ‫ ﻃﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬1
This standard specification is reviewed and updated
by the relevant technical committee on Aug 2005, as
amendment No. 1 by circular No. 277.
:2 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 2:
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد دو زﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺎزﻧﮕﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬1389 ‫ﻛﻪ در ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ‬.‫( اراﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬1) ‫اﻧﺠﺎم و ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
.‫( اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﺴﻮخ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0) ‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
This bilingual standard is a revised version of the
standard specification by the relevant technical
committee on April 2010, which is issued as
revision (1). Revision (0) of the said standard
specification is withdrawn.
:3 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 3:
‫ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ و اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻼك ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
In case of conflict between Farsi and English
languages, English language shall govern.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪي ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ در آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬،‫در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
.‫اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this Standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent specified
herein, form a part of this standard. For dated
references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the Company and the Vendor. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced
documents (including any supplements and
amendments) applies.
3
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
(‫ )ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻧﻔﺖ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬API
API(AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE)
RP 500
"Recommended Practice for
Classification of Locations
for Electrical Installations at
Petroleum
Facilities
Classified as Class 1,
Division 1 and Division 2"
RP 505
"Recommended Practice for
Classification of Locations
for Electrical Installations at
Petroleum
Facilities
Classified as Class 1, Zone 0,
Zone 1 and Zone 2"
RP 540
"Electrical Installation in
Petroleum Processing Plants”
Section 7-Lighting, Table 4Illuminances
Currently
Recommended
for
Petroleum, Chemical and
Petrochemical Plants
RP 554
"Process
Instrumentation
and
Control,
Control
Centers"
‫"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ در‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻧﻔﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬
1 ‫ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬،‫ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ‬،1 ‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻛﻼس‬
"2 ‫و ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫"ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ در واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬
"‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان‬-4 ‫ ﺟﺪول‬،‫ روﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬7 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬
"‫ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬،‫ﻧﻔﺖ‬
RP 505
،‫"ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
"‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
RP 554
RP 540
IEC 60079
(‫ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬IES
‫"روﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻣﺮوزي‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ و‬،‫ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
"‫ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬
"Illuminances
Currently
Recommended
for
Petroleum, Chemical and
Petrochemical Plants"
Table G1
(‫ )ﺳﺎزﻣﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ISO
ISO (INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION
FOR STANDARDIZATION)
ISO 11064
RP 500
‫"وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
" ‫ﮔﺎز ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬
"Electrical Apparatus for
Explosive
Gas
Atmospheres"
IES
(ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING
SOCIETY)
Table G1
‫"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ در‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻧﻔﺖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬
.2 ‫ و ﺑﺨﺶ‬1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺶ‬،1 ‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻛﻼس‬
(‫ )ﻛﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮن ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ‬IEC
IEC (INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION)
IEC 60079
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫"ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
"5-1‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
"Ergonomic Design of
Control Centers Parts 1~5"
ISO 11064
(‫ )اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت‬ITU
ITU(INTERNATIONAL
TELECOMMUNICATION UNION)
ITU-R M.539-3
ITU-R M.539-3
‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ و ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي‬
"‫ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان رادﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦاﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬
"Technical and Operational
Characteristics of International
Radio Paging Systems"
4
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
(‫) اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-E-EL-100
"Engineering and Equipment
Standard
for
Electrical
System
Design(Industrial
&Non-Industrial)"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-E-EL-100
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ و‬
"(‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
IPS-E-IN-180
"Engineering Standard for
Instruments Electrical Power
Supply and Distribution
Systems"
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ادوات اﺑﺰار‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫دﻗﻴﻖ‬
"‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬
IPS-E-IN-180
IPS-E-IN-190
"Engineering Standard for
Transmission Systems"
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
"‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬
IPS-E-IN-190
IPS-C-IN-190 "Installation
and
Construction Standard for
Transmission Systems"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-C-IN-190
"‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬
IPS-M-IN-220 "Material
Standard
for
Control Panels and System
Cabinets"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻛﺎﻻ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-M-IN-220
"‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
IPS-G-IN-250 "Engineering
and
Construction Standard for
Distributed
Control
System (DCS)"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-G-IN-250
"(DCS) ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻌﻲ‬
IPS-M-TP-125 "Material and Equipment
Standard for White Alkyd
Paint for Top Coat Finish"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻛﺎﻻ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي رﻧﮓ‬IPS-M-TP-125
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻗﻠﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ روﻳﻲ‬
"‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
IPS-E-SF-260 "Engineering Standard for
Automatic Detectors and
Fire Alarm Systems".
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬IPS-E-SF-260
"‫آﺷﻜﺎرﺳﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر و ﻫﺸﺪار آﺗﺶ‬
IPS-G-SF-900 "General Standard for Noise
Control and Vibration"
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻮﻳﺰ و‬IPS-G-SF-900
"‫ﻟﺮزش‬
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-3
3. UNITS
،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This Standard is based on International System
of Units (SI), as per IPS-E-GN-100 , except
where otherwise specified.
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬-4
4. GENERAL
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬،‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻳﻚ روش ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آﻧﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻗﻴﻖ‬.‫ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬.‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻣﻘﺮرات ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮدار و ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
It is recommended practice to centralize control
of process units, particularly when their
operations are integrated. Centralization of
control requires a careful choice of control center
location; evaluation of control center building
design factors, and regulation of the building
internal environment for the comfort of operating
personnel and protection of the control
equipment.
5
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-5
5. CONTROL CENTER LOCATION
‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار‬،‫در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
:‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
In selecting a control center location, the
following factors shall be considered:
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬1-5
5.1 Control Center Size
a) Control center size will vary in accordance
with the number of process units to be
controlled from that location.
‫اﻟﻒ( اﻧﺪازه ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﺪاد واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬
b) It also contains auxiliary equipment such
as, power supplies, logic cabinets, etc.
‫ب( اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
c) Auxiliary equipments shall be installed in a
separate rooms, especially those which are
not to be manipulated by the Operators, such
as Logic Cabinets, Power Supplies, etc.
‫ج( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎي ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
d) The future expansion shall be taken into
consideration.
.‫د( ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ آﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
e) Since it is a working quarter for operators,
process engineers, and technicians, it is
usually necessary to provide such facilities as
offices, conference rooms, etc.
‫ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻫ( از آﻧﺠﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در‬،‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ و ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫آن ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ دﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫و( ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰم ﻳﻚ اﺗﺎق ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻛﻪ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻻﺟﻴﻚ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً آﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار‬،‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ و‬،‫ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻻﺟﻴﻚ‬،‫دﺳﺘﻜﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻏﻴﺮه‬
f) The installation of a computer may require
a separate computer room along with offices
for analysis or programming, or both.
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه اﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ و ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ و ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ دو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ز( ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
g) The computer shall be located so as to
minimize cabling lengths between the
computer room and both the auxiliary and
control rooms.
‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ و اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬2-5
5.2 Safety Aspects
‫ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬1-2-5
5.2.1 Area classification
‫اﻟﻒ( اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
a) It would be very costly and, in many cases,
very restrictive if it were necessary to install
explosion proof equipment in the control
center.
‫ ﭘﺮوژه ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﮔﺮان و در ﺑﺴﻴﺎري ﻣﻮارد‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪت ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
b) Therefore, the building shall be located in
safe area, where this is absolutely not
possible; the building shall be pressurized to
be safe internally. In classifying areas, the
latest edition of IEC 60079, API RP 500 and
API RP 505, Classification of Areas for
Electrical
Installations
in
Petroleum
Refineries, or any other equivalent standard
shall be considered.
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اﻳﻤﻦ ﻗﺮار‬،‫ب( ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻤﻦ‬،‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ در‬.‫ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
، IEC 60079 ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
‫ "ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬API RP505 ‫ و‬API RP500
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ در ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎهﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻌﺎدل دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
6
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه از واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ‬2-2-5
5.2.2 Recommended distance from process
units
a) If possible, the control center shall be
located far enough from the operating areas
so that the vapors will be dispersed before
reaching the control center.
‫ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ از‬،‫اﻟﻒ( در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن‬
b) The minimum distance between the control
center and process units shall be 20 meters.
‫ب( ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
c) Control centers shall be located away from
sources of vibration.
.‫ج( ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دور از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﺮزش ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
d) The control center shall preferably be
located on high ground so that open drainage
lines or hydrocarbon spills will not carry
hydrocarbon vapors to the control center.
‫د( ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺎرات ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻞ از رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﺮاﻛﻨﺪه ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
،‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎز و ﻳﺎ رﻳﺰش ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺨﺎرات ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از اﻧﻔﺠﺎرات ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬3-2-5
5.2.3 Protection from external explosions
‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﺑﺰرگ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت را ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ و‬
.‫ ﺧﻄﺮﭘﺬﻳﺮي را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻛﺮده اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻳﻚ واﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي از‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ در‬.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻳﻚ درﺟﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ از ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در‬
.‫ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
Large control centers created to consolidate
operations have also created a consolidation of
risk. Damage to the building containing all the
control systems necessary for the operation of a
complete plant or a large number of process units
could result in a very costly shutdown of a
tremendous amount of equipment. This situation
has made it to consider constructing these
control centers with an appropriate degree of
blast resistance.
‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ و ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت‬3-5
5.3 Accessibility and Communication
a) Location of the control center near the
physical center of the plant will reduce signal
transmission distances and the time it takes
for an operator to reach the more remote
areas.
،‫اﻟﻒ( ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ واﺣﺪ‬
b) Location of the control center on the
periphery of the plant will increase the
average signal transmission distances and
could curtail operator inspection of the more
remote areas.
‫ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ‬،‫ب( ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داده و زﻣﺎن‬
‫رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار را ﺑﻪ دورﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
.‫ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ داده و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار از ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ دورﺗﺮ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
c) The use of electronic transmission systems
and radio communication will circumvent
these aforementioned problems.
‫ج( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ و ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت‬
d) Peripheral location will likely prove to be
fewer problems from the viewpoint of future
expansion and hazard criteria.
‫د( ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮﻧﻲ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻫﺎي آﺗﻲ و‬
.‫رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻠﻲ را ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ داراي ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﻛﻤﺘﺮي اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎرﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮ‬
7
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬4-5
5.4 Environmental Factors
a) The direction of the prevailing winds, and
noise from the process areas, shall be
considered, when locating the control center.
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ وزش‬،‫اﻟﻒ( در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
b) The control center shall be located up wind
from cooling towers, possible sources of
hydrocarbon vapors, or other hazardous
and/or corrosive gases such as hydrogen
sulfide or chlorine.
‫ب( ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻼف وزش ﺑﺎد از ﺳﻮي‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎدﻫﺎي ﻏﺎﻟﺐ و ﻧﻮﻳﺰ از ﻃﺮف ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﺎرات‬،‫ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك و ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ‬
.‫ و ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬H2S
‫ج( ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻔﺮه آب‬
c) The control center shall be located in an
area where the water table is below the
entrance of cables in to the control center.
6.
CONTROL
CENTER
REQUIREMENTS
‫زﻳﺮزﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ از ورودي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-6
BUILDING
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ‬1-6
6.1 Interior Space Considerations
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬1-1-6
6.1.1 Panels
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬
a) Panels shall be arranged to permit the
operator to survey the maximum panel area.
.‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ را ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ‬
b) It is desirable to design the control room
based on size and number of control panels.
‫ب( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎي اﻧﺪازه و ﺗﻌﺪاد‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ‬2-1-6
6.1.2 Consoles
a) Where consoles are installed as separate
components from the panels, they shall be
located in front of the control panel, with a
minimum aisle of 2 meters between the
console and the panel.
‫اﻟﻒ( در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺟﺪا از‬
b) If necessary, these devices can be
integrated with the panel instruments into one
console or panel.
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﺑﺰار‬،‫ب( اﮔﺮ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺟﻠﻮي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي‬2 ‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ راﻫﺮوي ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺮار داد‬
‫دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ و ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﻨﺴﻮل و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ و ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ‬3-1-6
6.1.3 Auxiliary equipment and utilities
،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
، ‫ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬،‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻔﺴﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻀﺎي‬،‫ﻓﻀﺎي دﻓﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
Space shall be provided for auxiliary control
equipment and other control center facilities,
such as auxiliary equipment racks, termination
cabinets, computer main frames, office space for
personnel, housekeeping facilities, etc.
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻣﻌﻤﺎري‬2-6
6.2 Architectural Considerations
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-2-6
6.2.1 General design considerations
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻃﺮح ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
a) Blast-resistance design shall include
8
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
consideration of foundation, exterior walls,
roof, doors and hardware, and air intakes.
‫ دربﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺳﻘﻒ‬،‫ دﻳﻮارﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬،‫در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن‬
.‫و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺨﺖ اﻓﺰاري و ﻣﺠﺎري ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
b) Building codes and standards in force for
the particular geographic area shall be used to
cover snow loading, wind loading and
seismic requirements.
‫ب( دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺟﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻓﺸﺎر‬
.‫ ﺑﺎد و زﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮف‬
‫ درب ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ‬2-2-6
6.2.2 Windows and doors
a) Because all openings in the exterior of
blast-resistance type of building are
considered weak points, they shall be kept to
the absolute minimum.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ آﻧﻜﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز در ﺧﺎرج ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
b) Blast-resistant design usually
exterior windows.
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎي‬،‫ب( در ﻃﺮح ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬
‫ ﻟﺬا‬،‫ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻧﻮع ﺿﺪ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬
.‫اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
precludes
.‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺻﺮف ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬3-2-6
6.2.3 Lighting
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ در ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
a) Typical in-service-lighting intensity in
various areas of the control room shall
be as follow:
0
AREA
:‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮار زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
ELEVATION
IN-SERVICE INTENSITY
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
Vertical control panels and consoles
‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
15 meter-candles (LUX)
All instrument areas
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻮدي و ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ‬
General control room area
‫ ﻟﻮﻛﺲ‬15
10 meter-candles (LUX)
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Back of panel areas and corridors
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬
Floor
‫ ﻟﻮﻛﺲ‬10
5-10 meter-candles (LUX)
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و راﻫﺮوﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻒ‬
Floor
‫ﻛﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻛﺲ‬10 -5
‫ب( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ‬
b) The use of diffusers and nonreflecting
glass on instrument bezels will minimize
glare appearance and physical discomfort.
‫ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،‫ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه روي ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬
.‫و ﻧﺎراﺣﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
c) Rear panel lighting could either be
incandescent or fluorescent.
‫ج( روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي‬
d) An emergency lighting system around the
perimeter of the panel shall be connected to
an emergency supply so that in the event of a
power failure, orderly limited operation or
shutdown action can be executed.
‫د( ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري در اﻃﺮاف ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫رﺷﺘﻪاي و ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﻮرﺳﻨﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ و ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ در‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﺤﺪود و ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮق‬
.‫واﺣﺪ ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬API 540 ‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
IPS-E-EL-100 ‫ و ﻳﺎ‬G1 ‫ ﺟﺪول‬IES ‫ ﻳﺎ‬4 ‫ ﺟﺪول‬7
.‫ "روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬G ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‬
For more information on luminance’s see
API 540 Section 7- Table 4, IES Table G1,
or IPS-E-EL-100 Appendix G- Lighting and
Wiring.
9
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺳﻘﻒ‬4-2-6
6.2.4 Ceiling
a) The minimum recommended floor to
ceiling height shall be 3 meters in order to
accommodate equipment and provide a good
appearance.
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬3 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻒ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ‬
b) An economic ceiling shall be a nondusting type of acoustical tile or board with
an exposed grid suspension system.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﺻﺪاﮔﻴﺮ و ﺿﺪ ﮔﺮد و‬،‫ب( ﻳﻚ ﺳﻘﻒ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در اﺗﺎق ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ و از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺒﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻏﺒﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اي ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻛﻒ‬5-2-6
6.2.5 Floor design
a) An access to computer floor, a false floor
shall be used in rooms with electronic
instrumentation
(including
DCS
and
computer rooms).
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎذب‬،‫اﻟﻒ( ﺟﻬﺖ ورود ﺑﻪ اﺗﺎق ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
b) This type of floor simplifies the routing of
cables between control panels and auxiliary
equipment or consoles.
‫ب( اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻛﻒ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و‬
c) It is also easily adaptable to additions or
revisions to the control room equipment.
‫ج( اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻛﻒ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻓﺰودن ﻳﺎ‬
d) A floor height of 65 cm to 75 cm from the
true floor to the top of the false floor is
recommended.
‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮي از ﻛﻒ واﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﺎ‬75 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬65 ‫د( ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﻒ‬
e) An alternative design would be one with a
cable spreading and distribution room below
the control room, used as auxiliary room,
which provides a place for installation of
auxiliary equipment, as well.
‫ﻫ( ﻃﺮح دﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ اﺗﺎق ﭘﺨﺶ و ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ در زﻳﺮ‬
f) The true floor shall be designed in a way to
hold the full weight of control panels and
other control room equipment plus certain
safety factor addition. An equipment shall be
mounted on metallic structure fixed to the
false floor
‫و( ﻛﻒ واﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم وزن‬
‫در اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻌﻲ و اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ را ﺳﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزد‬
.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎذب ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺗﺎق ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﺑﻮده و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻳﻚ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫روي ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮبﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎذب ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي‬6-2-6
6.2.6 Painting
a) The interior and exterior painting shall
follow the industrial standards in force (Refer
to IPS-M-TP-125 "White Alkyd Paint for Top
coat").
‫اﻟﻒ( رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي داﺧﻠﻲ و ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
b) A smooth color gradation from the floor to
ceiling and color continuity throughout the
building shall be considered.
‫ب( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﻲ رﻧﮓ از ﻛﻒ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ رﻧﮓ‬
IPS-M-TP-125 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻪ‬
‫"رﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻗﻠﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ روﺋﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
.(‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫در ﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
10
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ج( ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎذب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
c) All cables under false floor shall be laid on
trays/ ladders.
.‫ﻧﺮدﺑﺎنﻫﺎ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ورودي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬7-2-6
6.2.7 Cable entry
a) The initial installation shall have a
generous allowance for additional future
requirements.
‫اﻟﻒ( در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي آﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار‬
b) Ducts, conduits cable trenches, or entry
plates shall be sealed in accordance with
applicable standard (IPS-C-IN-190) to
prevent the entrance of vapors.
،‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫ب( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ورود ﺑﺨﺎرات‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻀﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﺮاﻧﺸﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ورودي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
.‫( آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬IPS-C-IN-190) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ داﺧﻠﻲ‬3-6
6.3 Internal Environment
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬1-3-6
6.3.1 Air conditioning
a) Air conditioning equipment shall be
selected and sized to maintain the conditions
that are conductive to human comfort and
required to protect the instrumentation
located in control centers.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و‬
b) The extent of air conditioning sizing other
than for human comfort shall be governed by
the type of equipment housed within the
control center and the ambient conditions
outside the control center. Under all
conditions, the temperature should be
maintained at 22°C ±2°C; the humidity shall
be between 50 and 60% RH and the rate of
change in temperature shall not exceed
0.25°C/ minute.
‫ب( اﻧﺪازه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﻓﺮاد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ رﻓﺎه اﻓﺮاد ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮده و از ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ واﻗﻊ در ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺖ‬.‫ﻫﻮاي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬22±2 ‫ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
60 ‫ درﺻﺪ و‬50 ‫ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد‬
‫ درﺟﻪ‬./25 ‫درﺻﺪ ﺑﻮده و ﻧﺮخ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ در دﻣﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس در دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
c) Consideration shall be given to potential
problems caused by air conditioning failure.
‫ج( ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮه ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
d) Either local fans or redundant air
conditioning systems shall be considered to
prevent serious overheating of electronic
equipment.
‫د( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﮔﺮﻣﺎي ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ اﻓﺰوﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﭘﺎك ﺳﺎزي ﻫﻮا‬2-3-6
6.3.2 Air purification
‫ ﭘﺎك ﺳﺎزي ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﻓﺮاد‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ در ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻧﺸﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ‬،‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ اﻧﻔﺠﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
In addition to providing for human comfort, air
purification shall be considered to protect the
instrumentation in the control center against
corrosion, abrasion, extraneous electrical leakage
conducting paths, and potentially hazardous fire
or explosive conditions.
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬3-3-6
6.3.3 Positive air pressure system
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك واﻗﻊ‬
a) When control centers are located in
hazardous areas and contain general purpose
‫ﺷﺪه و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
11
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
electrical equipment or other potential
ignition sources, they shall be designed to
prevent the entry of flammable atmospheric
vapors or gases in order to achieve a general
purpose classification.
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي‬،‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮه اﻳﺠﺎد ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ورود ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺎرات و‬
‫ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ در‬
.‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
b) The prevention of the entry of flammable
atmospheric vapors or gases shall be
accomplished with a positive pressure
ventilation system using a clean air source in
conjunction with effective safeguards against
ventilation failure.
‫ب( ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ از ورود ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺎرات و ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫اﺷﺘﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻫﻮاي‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻣﻮﺛﺮ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
c) The system shall be capable of maintaining
a pressure of at least 5 mm Water Column in
the control center with all openings closed.
‫ج( اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎري ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
d) In case of external fire or spill of
hazardous material, the air conditioning
system shall be placed on total recirculation
with no intake of air.
‫د( در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي در ﺧﺎرج و ﻳﺎ رﻳﺰش ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﺘﻮن آب را در ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺑﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬5
.‫ﺑﻮدن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺠﺎري ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮدش ﻫﻮاي‬،‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
.‫داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺪون ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻮاي ﺧﺎرج ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اداﻣﻪ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻮاي ﺗﺎزه ورودي‬4-3-6
6.3.4 Fresh air intake
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺜﺒﺖ در ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺎري از ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺨﺎرات و ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل و آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه و ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮده و اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻮا از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
.‫)اﻳﻤﻦ( و ﻋﺒﻮر از ﺻﺎﻓﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎزﻫﺎي ﮔﺎز و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺠﺎري‬
.‫ﻫﻮاي ورودي اﻃﺎق ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
The source of air for positive air pressure
systems in control centers shall be free of
hazardous concentrations of flammable vapors,
gases, corrosive contaminants, and any other
foreign matter, by taking the inlet air from nonclassified location and air filtration.
Gas detectors and relevant alarms shall be
installed in air intake ducts of the control rooms.
‫ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬5-3-6
6.3.5 Noise
a) Noise within the control center, especially
within the control room; shall be limited to
reduce the possibility of hearing damage and
physical discomfort and enable effective
speech communication either direct or by
telephone, radio, intercom, and so forth.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﺷﻨﻮاﻳﻲ و‬
b) Sound absorption materials shall be
considered to reduce the noise level to a
maximum of 50 decibels absolute with the
room unoccupied. For more information refer
to: IPS-G-SF-900 "Noise Control and
Vibration”.
‫ب( ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﻻزم ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺬب ﺻﺪا ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﻧﺎراﺣﺘﻲﻫﺎي ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﻋﻤﺎل ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻟﻔﻈﻲ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي‬،‫ رادﻳﻮ‬،‫ﭼﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫داﺧﻠﻲ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻣﻴﺰان ﻧﻮﻳﺰ در داﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺑﻮﻳﮋه‬
.‫در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ دﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬50 ‫در اﺗﺎق ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
IPS-G-SF-900 ‫ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫"ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺻﺪا و ﻟﺮزش" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎز آﺗﺶ و ﺑﺨﺎرات‬4-6
6.4 Hazardous Vapor and Fire Detection
System Requirements
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
a) Hazardous-vapor detection systems shall
be installed in control centers which have
unclassified interiors due to pressurization.
These would be essentially hydrocarbon
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎز ﺑﺨﺎرات ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻪ داراي ﻓﻀﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ اﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ وﺟﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
12
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
detectors but other devices such as fire or
smoke and toxic material detectors may also
be installed.
‫اﺳﺎﺳﺎً آﺷﻜﺎرﺳﺎزﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎي آﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ دود و ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
b) A sufficient number of portable CO2 fire
extinguishers of suitable size shall be
provided in the control room as well as the
auxiliary rooms.
‫ب( ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ دي‬
‫( در اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬CO2) ‫اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺑﻦ‬
.‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ و ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬5-6
6.5 Electrical and Instrumentation Grounding
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﺟﻬﺖ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن‬
a) Reliable ground systems shall be provided
to electrically ground panel boards,
computers, temperature consoles, and related
control equipment.
‫ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي دﻣﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
b) For more details refer to IPS-E-IN-190
"Engineering Standard for Transmission
System”.
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬IPS-E-IN-190 ‫ب( ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
c) Lightning arrestors shall be provided
wherever applicable.
.‫ج( ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮق ﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
7.
ARRANGEMENT
OF
CENTERS EQUIPMENT
.‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-7
CONTROL
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-7
7.1 General
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮر از ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ارﺗﺒﺎط آن ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮاي‬.‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮح‬.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ از اﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺪرت‬،‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪي و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗﻲ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
The purpose of this arrangement is to show the
control center and its relationships with other
relevant sub-systems. A typical example of this
is illustrated in figure 1. The descriptions and
functions of sub-systems for example process
units control consoles and panels, power
systems, communications systems and so on,
shall also be identified.
13
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
Fig. 1- TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF CONTROL CENTERS AND THEIR
RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER SUB-SYSTEMS
‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ارﺗﺒﺎط آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬-1 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬2-7
7.2 Control Consoles and Panels
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-2-7
7.2.1 General
‫ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮدار در‬،‫ﻫﺪف ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪ و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻤﻦ واﺣﺪ ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮل آن ﺑﻮده و از ﻣﺤﻠﻲ دور از واﺣﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
The purpose of control consoles and panels is to
aid operating personnel in maintaining efficient
and safe performance of the process plant for
which they are responsible from a location
remote from the plant.
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ و ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد واﺣﺪ را در زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل و ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده و‬
.‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ در زﻣﺎن ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ واﺣﺪ اﻋﻼم و ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
The instrumentation mounted in the console or
panel must provide current and historical plant
operating data as well as warn of plant
malfunctions.
‫ ﻓﺮﻣﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬3-7
7.3 Consoles Styles
‫( و ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬DCS) ‫ارﺗﺒﺎط اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً روي ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬.‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
The operator interface for DCS and computer
systems is mainly via monitor and keyboard
combinations. These are usually mounted in
freestanding consoles.
14
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
General industry practice dictates that a
minimum of two operational displays, together
with their dedicated key boards, are necessary to
provide sufficient data and access to controls for
safe plant operation .it is recommended that at
least one additional monitor, keyboard set to be
provided to allow for malfunction of one of the
other sets.
‫روش راﻳﺞ در ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﻬﻤﺮاه‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ داده ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ و‬
.‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮلﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد اﻳﻤﻦ واﺣﺪ ﻻزم ﻣﻲ داﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﺮاب‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
DCS/ computer consoles are also likely to house
auxiliary equipment such as system loading
devices,
indicators,
recorders,
alarm
annunciators, and various push buttons and
switches to display and/or control critical plant
variables. Hard copy printers and screen copiers
are also sometimes provided. Console
configurations may be multiunit, in-line or
wraparound styles. Heights vary, but most are
designed for operation from a seated position. A
writing surface is recommended.
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬DCS ‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي‬
،‫ ﺛﺒﺎتﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و دﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎري و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫را ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ و ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻲ واﺣﺪ در ﺧﻮد‬
.‫ در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬.‫ﺟﺎي دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ در روي ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﭼﻨﺪ واﺣﺪي‬
‫ اﻣﺎ اﻏﻠﺐ‬،‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي دورﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬.‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬DCS ‫راﻳﺞ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪودي‬.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎي وﻳﮋه ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ را در ﻃﺮح اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻧﻮاع ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﺑﻮﻳﮋه در‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد )از ﻣﻴﺎن‬.‫ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ‬
،‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮارد( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺿﺮﺑﻪ اي ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻟﺮزش ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﻳﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
It is most common that DCS consoles be
provided as standard equipment by the DCS
vendor. Usually the vendor will provide for
some degree of customization of the standard
design to meet user’s specific requirements.
Other types of consoles are those dedicated to a
specific function especially when used in
conjunction with control panels. These include
(among others) compressor surge control
systems, compressor/pump vibration detector
systems, and so forth. A typical console is shown
in Figure 2.
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬4-7
7.4 Space Considerations
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ در اﻃﺮاف ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ‬1500 ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎدل‬
.‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫دربﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮاردادن ﺳﺨﺖ اﻓﺰار و دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪاﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Clearances of 1500 millimeters should be provided
around consoles to permit adequate operations and
maintenance access. Console doors should be
removable to accommodate hardware servicing
and ready access to all wiring.
‫ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬DCS ‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬5-7
7.5 DCS/Monitor Installation Consideration
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺳﻄﻮح‬،‫اﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎ در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ داراي ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل در ﻣﻌﺮض‬
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬،‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺪرت‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ دار ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از‬.‫ﻣﺠﺎور ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت زوج ﺑﻬﻢ‬.‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﻘﺪور ﻛﻮﺗﺎه و‬.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از‬.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻮده و داراي ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻤﻲ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺧﻮد دارﻧﺪ‬
Many signals in video display consoles are high
frequency, low-level signals making them
susceptible to noise from power, ground, or
adjacent signal wires. Consequently, signal
protection should be provided by means of
shielded cable. Individual signal wires must be
of twisted pair construction. Ground leads should
be kept as short and as straight as possible with
few connections. Some video display console
installations require dedicated system earth
grounds.
15
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻴﺎن ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﻗﺪرت ﻋﺒﻮر‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از اﻳﺠﺎد‬.‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎزﻧﻲ و اﻣﭙﺪاﻧﺲ زﻳﺎد ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻒ و‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮل ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﻘﺪور‬،‫ﻳﺎ اﻋﻮﺟﺎج ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻃﻮل زﻳﺎد ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬.‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ روي ﻛﺎر ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ ﻟﺬا ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ )ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺴﻮل اﺛﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد‬
‫رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دور از‬
‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬
‫ ﺑﻬﺮ ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي راه دور ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ‬.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫روي ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺣﻔﺎظ دار دﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ اﻳﻦ اﺟﺎزه را ﻣﻲ‬
‫دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ واﺣﺪ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺮﻗﺮارﻛﻨﻨﺪ و در ﺿﻤﻦ اﺛﺮ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﺑﺮ ﺟﺎي ﻧﮕﺬارﻧﺪ‬
Signal cables should not be routed along the
same cable ways as power cables nor routed
close to electric motors or other equipment
capable of generating significant amounts of
electromagnetic interference. Cable length
should be kept to a minimum to avoid excessive
cable capacitance and impedance, which may
lead to signal attenuation and distortion. Long
cable length also increases the possibility of
electrical noise pickup.
Radio frequency interference may impact the
normal operation of console equipment;
therefore, sources of radiation such as portable
radio transmitters should be operated away from
consoles and other control center equipment.
However, the use of remote transmitters with
carefully placed and shielded handsets will
permit console operators to communicate with
the field and will not have an adverse effect on
console equipment.
Fig. 2- TYPICAL CONSOLE
‫ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬-2 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬6-7
7.6 Panel Styles
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-6-7
7.6.1 General
‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪادي از ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻀﺎي‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬،‫ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ از آﻧﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان‬.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر و ﻏﻴﺮه دارد‬
‫ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬.‫در ﻃﺮح ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﻈﺮات ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ دارﻧﺪ‬
The type of panel selected is dependent on a
number of factors such as space available, need
for graphic displays, number of instruments per
operator, and so forth. Since many users have
different concerns in panel design, the following
16
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
typical designs are presented for consideration
rather than as recommendations.
.‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ و ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Panels may be freestanding cubicles or be built
into the control room and extend from floor to
ceiling.
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮداﻳﺴﺘﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه در داﺧﻞ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ از ﻛﻒ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ اداﻣﻪ‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ آﻧﺎﻟﻮﮔﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻮدي و ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ وﺟﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل اﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم‬.‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻻي آن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ را ﺑﻄﺮف ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ دﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮي‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Analog displays are usually mounted in the
vertical or near vertical face of the panel with
alarm annunciators generally mounted above. It
is common for the alarm annunciators to be tilted
forward of the vertical plane for better visual
access.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬2-6-7
7.6.2 Conventional panels
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ادوات اﺑﺰار‬
.‫دﻗﻴﻖ در ردﻳﻔﻬﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ و ﻋﻤﻮدي روي آن ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
A conventional panel is defined as a panel with
instruments, mounted in horizontal and vertical
rows.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬3-6-7
7.6.3 Semi graphic panels
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻي ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﮔﺮوه‬
‫ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻮده اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﻗﺮار دارد‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
The semi graphic panel combines the
compactness of a conventional panel with a
process flow plan located above grouped
instruments. Semi graphic panel board shapes
are shown in Figure 2.
(F&G) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ آﺗﺶ و ﮔﺎز‬7-7
7.7 Fire and Gas Detection Systems (F&G)
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ آﺗﺶ و ﮔﺎز ﺑﻮده ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺿﻄﺮاري وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺴﺎزد‬
Fire and Gas Detection Systems is the
combination of fire and gas detection systems
connected to emergency shut-down system and
also activate automatic extinguishing systems.
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ آﺗﺶ‬1-7-7
7.7.1 Fire detection system
Fire detectors and associated control panel to
detect and alarm to personnel for evacuation of
the plant area and building as well as to indicate
the location of the incident to fire brigade to
proceed to the scene of the incident (if
available).
‫ آﺗﺶ را ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬، ‫آﺷﻜﺎرﺳﺎزﻫﺎي آﺗﺶ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن اﻋﻼم‬،‫و ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ واﺣﺪ و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ واﻗﻌﻪ را ﺑﻪ آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ )اﮔﺮ در دﺳﺘﺮس‬.‫ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﻣﺤﻞ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.(‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
7.7.1.1 Wherever "the siren" is mentioned in this
section, this could mean a number of sirens
operated in parallel when required for adequate
coverage of extensive premises.
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ "ﺑﻮق ﺧﻄﺮ" )آژﻳﺮ( ذﻛﺮ‬1-1-7-7
‫ﺷﻮد ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺪادي آژﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن در‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﻴﺎز ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ وﺳﻴﻌﻲ‬
.‫را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬2-7-7
7.7.2 Alarm panel
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ذﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي‬1-2-7-7
7.7.2.1 The alarm panel shall have indicating
lamps for;
:‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ؛‬‫ ﮔﺮوه اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ؛‬-
- Individual alarms,
- Group alarms,
17
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
- Power "on",
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺮق؛‬،‫ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬،‫ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬.‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي و ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
- System faults such as; electricity supply
failure, over-current, low battery voltage,
system failure.
:‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-2-7-7
7.7.2.2 The panel shall have operating controls:
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش )ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮوه(؛‬/‫ روﺷﻦ‬‫ آزﻣﻮن )ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ(؛‬‫ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ؛‬‫ ﺑﺎزﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل )ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬(‫ورودي‬
- On/off (per group),
- Test (simulating alarm condition),
- Cancel the audible alarm,
- Reset the system (clear input memory).
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در‬3-2-7-7
7.7.2.3 When the alarm and control panels are
located in the fire station, consideration should
be given to the use of the typical fire alarm
systems available commercially. The control
panel shall match the size and appearance of the
alarm panel. The complete alarm and pertinent
control system, together with logic circuitry and
electricity supply, shall preferably be arranged in
one cubicle or cabinet.
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي‬،‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺪازه و ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ً‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎ‬،‫ ﺑﻬﻤﺮاه ﻣﺪارات ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ و ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫در ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در اﺗﺎق‬4-2-7-7
7.7.2.4 When the alarm and control panels are
located in the control room, preference should be
given to a design matching other alarm/control
systems in the control room. The logic circuitry
and electricity supply shall then be
accommodated in the auxiliary room.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺪارات ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ و ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬.‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬3-7-7
7.7.3 Control system
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-3-7-7
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫و ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ در اﻃﺎق‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ و‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬IPS-E-SF-260 ‫آﺗﺶ و ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
7.7.3.1 General
The fire alarm and control system shall comprise
of an alarm system and a control system. The
location of the alarm and control panel shall be
in the fire station or in the central control room.
The control of fire fighting systems for control
rooms and digital computers is not covered
herein and shall be specified by the vendors.
For more information about Fire and Gas
Detection Systems references should be made to
IPS-E-SF-260 “Engineering Standard for
Automatic Detectors and Alarm Systems”.
18
‫)‪IPS-G-IN-220(1‬‬
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪April 2010/ 1389‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ – ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ب – ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ج( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ راﻫﺮو دار‬
‫ه( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ دار‬
‫د( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺐ دار در ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Fig. 3- TYPICAL PANEL SHAPES‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -3‬ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪19‬‬
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬8-7
7.8 Instrument Arrangements
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬
.‫ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﭼﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻗﺎدر ﺳﺎزد ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از‬
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﻮده و‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻛﺪﻫﺎي رﻧﮕﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ اﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ و‬،‫ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬20 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات آﺗﻲ در ﺣﺪود‬
Instruments should be arranged in configurations
that reflect the process flow.
A system that enables an operator to quickly
identify any particular instrument is desirable
and should be considered in the panel layout.
Nameplates, color codes, or symbols frequently
are used. Spare panel space, about 20 percent, is
recommended to allow for future modification
and expansion.
‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ ادوات‬،ً‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ وﺟﻮد دارد‬،‫اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
.‫ ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎر ردﻳﻒ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ ﻧﻮع ادوات‬،‫ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪ و ارﺟﺤﻴﺖﻫﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬،‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه‬1 ‫ﺛﺒﺎتﻫﺎ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮلﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ در ﺟﺪول‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
Normally, a limitation is placed on the maximum
and minimum heights for mounting instruments
on the panel. Typical vertical density is three or
four rows.
The density of instrument varies with the type of
panel, type of instruments, complexity of the
process, and preference of the user. Average
panel density for the various types of panels
based on recording and controlling instruments
per running meter is tabulated in Table 1.
1
TABLE 1 - PANEL INSTRUMENT DENSITY
‫ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
٢
4
NUMBER OF INSTRUMENTS PER LINEAR METER OF PANEL
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
Large-Case Instruments
(larger than 144 × 144 mm)
Type of Panel
Miniature Instruments (Nominal
144 × 144 mm Larger
Than 72 × 144 mm)
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺰرگ‬
(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬144 ×144 ‫)ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
Conventional 3-6
Graphic
---
Semi graphic --Console
---
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬
Subminiature Instruments
(72 × 144 mm and smaller)
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮري‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬144 × 144 ‫) ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬72 × 144 ‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از‬
‫ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ از ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮري‬
(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ‬72 ×144 )
Conventional
9-15
Conventional
Graphic
5-7
Graphic
Semi graphic
Console
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
9-15 ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
9-15
‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬
Semi graphic
Console
45-90
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
30-90 ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
30-60
‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬
8-12
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬9-7
7.9 Space Considerations
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ و ﻗﻔﺴﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ در‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1500 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫روي دﻳﻮار‬
Clearance between the back of the panel and
auxiliary equipment racks, located along the
wall, should be a minimum of 1500 millimeters.
20
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬10-7
7.10 Fabrication
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬1-10-7
7.10.1 Control room panels
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ و ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ و‬
‫داراي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎر‬
.‫ﭼﻮب اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﻦﻫﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺑﺎدﮔﻴﺮ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ دﻓﻊ ﺣﺮارت‬
‫ اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮارتزا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي‬.‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺮارت ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻴﻮبﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ورود و ﺧﺮوج ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻧﺪه ﺳﺎزه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
‫ در‬.‫ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ راﺣﺖﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ورود ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎي ﻗﺪرت و ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
Control room panels are usually freestanding in
the form of a box, with a panel front bolted or
welded to the frame.
Louvered openings and cooling fans should be
provided to remove heat. Heat-producing items
should be mounted in the higher portions of the
panel to prevent heat from coming in contact
with other equipment in the panels.
Cables, conduit, pneumatic tubing, or piping
entering or leaving the panel should be provided
for in the panel supporting structure through the
use of bulkheads or conveniently located
termination points. Consideration should be
given to the most convenient point for power and
signals to enter the panel.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي واﻗﻊ در واﺣﺪ‬2-10-7
7.10.2 Field panels
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در واﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﻓﻮﻻد اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻘﺎوم در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻮرﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ در واﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬.‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ دربﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ از‬،‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫ درب ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ واﺷﺮ آب ﺑﻨﺪي‬.‫ﭘﺸﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮده و داراي ﭼﻔﺖ و ﺑﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻪ‬
. (‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪاي‬
‫ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺒﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮب ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬.‫ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫آﻣﺪهي ﺳﺎﻳﺒﺎن‬
.‫ﺳﺎزه ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ در واﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻓﻊ ﺣﺮارت از ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ در واﺣﺪ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬4 ‫ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ و رﻧﮓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ در واﺣﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ دﻗﻴﻖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
Field-mounted panels are usually made of
standard steel or corrosion resistant thermoplate.
They may be located in areas where atmospheric
corrosion is severe. Field panels may be enclosed
and should have rear-access doors for service.
Doors should be gasketed and furnished with
latches (preferably 3-point locking).
Air purging may be required for environmental
reasons as well as for electrical safety. The panel
should be provided with steel top and canopy
with lighting installed beneath the extended
canopy. The framework should be made of
structural steel shapes.
Lifting lugs should be provided for field handling.
Instrument heat dissipation must be provided. Figure
4 illustrates typical field panels. Special
consideration should be given to environmental and
local conditions in the selection of finishes for
outdoor mounted panels and material.
‫ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬3-10-7
7.10.3 Auxiliary racks
‫ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار دادن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ و داراي‬.‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮب از ﺳﺎزه ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﺠﺎب ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و داراي درب ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Racks may be used to house control system
components. Racks should be freestanding and
framed in structural steel shapes. Environmental
conditions may require that they be enclosed and
provided with doors.
21
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
Fig. 4- TYPICAL FIELD PANELS
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ در واﺣﺪ‬-4‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬11-7
7.11 Electrical Installation
a) For detailed information concerning
electrical installation, Refer to IPS-C-IN-190
"Construction Standard for Transmission
Systems". Electrical installation shall be in
accordance with the latest edition of relevant
IPS
electrical
standards.
The
area
classification and instrument components will
determine the minimum enclosure size,
conduit, and sealing requirements.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺸﺮوح در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت‬
b) For ease of maintenance and checking, it is
desirable to terminate incoming and outgoing
field leads in auxiliary racks, and to mount in
the racks such items as power supplies,
current
alarm
relays,
annunciator
components, loop protection auxiliary devices
for analyzers, and resistors for computer
inputs.
‫ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ‬،‫ب( ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ‬
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬IPS-C-IN-190 ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت‬.‫و ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬.‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖ و اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت آب‬،‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬،‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻧﺪازه‬،‫اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬
.‫ﺑﻨﺪي را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ورودي و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ از واﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
‫ رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم‬،‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬:‫ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺷﺪه و اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬،‫ اﺟﺰاء ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬،‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺪار آﻧﺎﻻﻳﺰرﻫﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ورودي ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ج( ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ورودي و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ‬
c) All incoming and outgoing electrical leads
shall be terminated on suitably enclosed
22
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
terminal strips except for low-level signals
which shall run directly to instruments. AC
wiring shall terminate in cabinet separate
from DC wiring. Special consideration shall
be given to the requirements of intrinsically
safe installations.
‫ﻧﻮار ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ادوات‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺟﺪا از ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬
ً‫ در ﻣﻮرد اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت "ذاﺗﺎ‬.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﻤﻦ" ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻣﺒﺬول ﮔﺮدد‬
d) AC power wiring shall be run in separate
conduit or duct from DC signal and power
wiring. The conduits, trays, or ducts shall be
separated as far as practical to avoid signal
distortion.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﻘﺪور در ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖﻫﺎ و‬AC ‫د( ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻗﺪرت‬
‫ ﻗﺮار‬DC ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺪاي از ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل و ﻗﺪرت‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ‬،‫ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻘﺪور ﺟﺪا از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ از اﻋﻮﺟﺎج در ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬
.‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬1-11-7
7.11.1 Electrical supply
a) AC power supply to panel will be 230-Volt
or 110-volt, 50 Hz, 3-wire, grounded, single
phase.
110 ‫ وﻟﺖ و ﻳﺎ‬230 ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬AC ‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
b) DC power supply required for loop power
to electronic instruments may be furnished
from externally mounted common power
sources, back-of-panel mounted instrument
power units, or power supplies built into the
receiving instruments.
‫ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪار ﻗﺪرت ادوات‬DC ‫ب( ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
c) Refer to IPS-E-IN-180 & IPS-E-IN-190
"Power Supply and Transmission Systems
Standards".
IPS-E-IN-190 ‫ و‬IPS-E-IN-180 ‫ج( ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬، ‫ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬50 ،‫وﻟﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻮد‬
‫اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫در ﺧﺎرج‬
‫ ﻳﺎ از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ در ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬،‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
.‫ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه‬
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬2-11-7
7.11.2 Wiring
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬
a) AC Power
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬2/5 ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ وﻟﺘﻲ‬600 ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ اﻓﺸﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
:‫ ﻛﺪ رﻧﮕﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﻬﻮه اي‬: ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻓﺎز ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬
‫ آﺑﻲ روﺷﻦ‬: ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻧﻮل ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬
‫ زرد‬/‫ ﺳﺒﺰ‬: ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ زرد‬: ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬: ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻗﻄﻊ واﺣﺪ‬
(AC) wiring shall be 2.5 mm² stranded with a
standard color code and 600-volt insulation.
The following color code shall be adhered:
AC supply hot : Brown
AC supply neutral : Light Blue
Ground : Green/Yellow
Alarm system : Yellow
Control and shutdown system : Red
‫ﻫﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ از ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از‬
‫( در‬2) ‫( ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮕﺮدد و‬1) ‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺪام از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ارﺗﺒﺎط زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺮق ﻗﺪرت ﺑﻴﻦ ده ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺴﺖ درﺻﺪ ﻓﻀﺎي‬
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
Each device requiring AC power shall be
wired so that when wires are removed from
any one device (1) power will not be
disrupted to any other device and (2) ground
will not be broken from any other device. 10
to 20 percent spare space shall be provided
for power wiring.
23
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل اﺑﺰار ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻳﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ وﻟﺖ و ﻳﺎ‬230 ‫ وﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ‬110 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬،‫آزﻣﻮن‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ از ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ داراي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎي ﺧﻮدﻧﮕﻬﺪار‬،‫از ﻧﻮع ﻏﻼﻓﻬﺎي ﺣﺒﺎﺑﻲ‬
.‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
It is recommended that a 230 V/110 Volt AC
service or convenient outlet independent of
instrument power supplies to be provided for
each panel section to allow plugging in
portable tools or test instruments.
Each wire end shall be tagged for
identification by means of a printed slip-on
sleeve, self-stick label, or similar means.
‫ب( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل و ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
b) DC Power and Signal
2/5 ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎي اﻓﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺜﺒﺖ و‬
.‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﻻزم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻧﺪازه ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮم‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ‬1/5 ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﺸﺎن‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1/5 ‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ و‬0/5 ‫)ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.(‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS ‫داراي ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً از ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ واﻗﻊ‬،ً‫)ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
.(‫در واﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه اﻣﺘﺪاد ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬، ‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬،‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﺪرت‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪار و ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻏﻼف ﻫﺎي ﺣﺒﺎﺑﻲ‬
.‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ داراي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
DC power wiring shall be 2.5 mm² stranded,
although larger wire size will likely be
required for supply (+) and return (-) buses.
Current densities must be checked to
determine required wire size.
DC signal wire shall be 1.5 mm² stranded.
Thermocouple extension wire shall be 1.5
mm² (multi-conductor cables shall be 0.5
mm² and color coded as per IPS Standard
with wire types). (Usually, thermocouple
wiring shall be run directly to the receiving
instruments from the field thermocouples).
Each wire end for power, signal and
thermocouple wiring shall be tagged for
identification by means of a printed slip-on
sleeve, self-stick label, or similar means.
‫ج( ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
c) Inter wiring
‫ﻧﻮارﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل در ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻘﺎط اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎ‬.‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي داﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ دو ﻃﺮف اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﻢ وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ از ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫داﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ در داﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Terminal strips shall be provided at all
shipping section joints for inter panel section
wiring. Terminals shall be on both sides of
the joints with short interconnecting jumper
leads provided between the terminals.
Terminals shall be enclosed in boxes and
wires pulled back in panel boxes for
shipment.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻊ‬3-11-7
7.11.3 Disconnect switches
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻊ روي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار‬
‫دﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه دﻣﺎ و ﻫﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﻚ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻃﺮف زﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ روش ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺶ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ از ﻳﻚ‬
(‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮط آﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻤﻮدار )ﭼﺎرت‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ از ﻧﻮع‬.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
Disconnect switches on the AC power supply to
each temperature indicating instrument and each
annunciator can be single pole for the usual oneside-grounded supply system.
It is common practice to have one disconnect
switch serve as many as six instruments when
only chart-drive power is involved. For cabinet
type annunciators with multiple-alarm units, one
power disconnect switch is usually used for each
24
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
cabinet. Each disconnect switch shall be clearly
labeled to identify the particular instruments or
alarm unit served by that switch. Each 110 Volt
AC-powered electronic instrument shall be
provided with a separate power disconnect
switch. A standard 3-pin grounding or twist-lock
plug may be used instead of a switch. Power is
often distributed to such plugs through a plug
mold/wire mold channel.
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ داراي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ و ﻳﺎ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ آن ﻗﺮار دارد را ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ وﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬110 ‫ ﻫﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬.‫دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﭘﻼگ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻼگ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ ﺑﺮق‬.‫ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺠﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده واﻗﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻏﻠﺐ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻼگ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼگ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬4-11-7
7.11.4 Terminal blocks
a) Terminal blocks shall be provided on
panels and sub assemblies for power-supply
wiring, alarm-system wiring, and electrical
transmission lines.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
Normally, no terminal blocks are permitted
for thermocouple extension wires, nor for
some types of analyzers (pH and so forth). It
is preferred that these be run directly to the
receiving instrument. The terminal blocks
shall be clearly identified with permanently
marked terminal numbers and terminal block
number.
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﺧﻲ اﻧﻮاع‬
‫ و ﻏﻴﺮه( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻣﻮرد‬PH) ‫آﻧﺎﻻﻳﺰرﻫﺎ‬
ً‫ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﻪ ادوات ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي داﺋﻤﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻠﻮك ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
b) 25 percent spare terminals shall be
considered. Good practice indicates the use of
doors on terminal strip enclosures. As a
minimum, covers shall be provided for
terminals.
‫ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬%25 ‫ب( ﻣﻘﺪار‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫روش ﺧﻮب ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮار ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي درب ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ‬5-11-7
7.11.5 Panel board grounding
a) The panel shall be grounded through
attachment to a ground bus which is attached
to the panel. The principle reason for the bus
is to ground the instrument circuits, but it will
also ground the panel if the two are properly
connected.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
On some installations the instrument ground
system must be isolated from other system
grounds. This requires the instrument ground
bus to be electrically isolated from the panel,
its ground, AC power supply grounds, and
incoming conduit or trays.
‫در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ زﻣﻴﻦ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰم آن‬.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺰا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ از ﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ از ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬
،‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬، ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ آن‬
.‫و ورودي ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺰا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
b) Separate ground buses for AC and DC
circuits offer a reasonable safeguard against
feedback through the ground system from one
instrument to another. Such buses shall be
typically copper, 6 mm thick and 25 to 40
mm wide. Each panel section shall have its
own buses, with the center of the buses
‫ب( ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪارات ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب و‬
،‫ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻴﻨﻪ‬.‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ اﺳﺖ زﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ وﻟﻲ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ و‬،‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺪارات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﻴﺰ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ادوات ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ج‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫ﺑﺮق ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن از ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي از‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ‬25 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ و ﻋﺮض‬6 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬40
25
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
connected to a ground point, which is
common to all panel section grounds and
from which an adequately sized conductor
leads to the earth ground.
‫ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ اﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎم زﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و از آﻧﺠﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎدي ﺑﺎ‬
.‫اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
c) For a detailed discussion of panel
grounding requirements, Reference to be
made to (IPS-C-IN-190), "Transmission
Systems Standard".
‫ج( ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮح ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ‬
"‫( "ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬IPS-C-IN-190) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ‬12-7
7.12 Piping
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬1-12-7
7.12.1 Supply header
‫اﻟﻒ( روش ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻮاي اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬
a) Practice regarding instrument air supply to
panels varies. On small panels with few
instruments, it is preferable to use a separate
pressure reducing filter-regulator for each
instrument. The more commonly used system
consists of a single air header supplied from
two parallel filters and regulators, each
capable of supplying 100 percent of the panel
requirements. Each filter and regulator
combination shall be provided with inlet and
outlet block valves. The reduced air pressure
header shall be 1½" in diameter, or larger as
required. If pressure drop considerations
require more than a 2" diameter header for
extremely long panels, a duplicate dual
reducing station arrangement shall be
furnished at each end of the header.
‫ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻤﻲ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار‬.‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬،‫دﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ راﻳﺞ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ‬.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دو ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻮازي ﺗﻐــــﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﻳﻦ دو ﻗﺎدر اﺳﺖ ﺻﺪ درﺻﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬.‫ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي ورودي و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺪود‬
‫ ﺑﻮده ﻳﺎ‬1 1 ″ ‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
2
،‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬.‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ را ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬2″ ‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه دوﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر‬،‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻻزم ﺳﺎزد‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
1
″
4
b) Individual take-offs, ¼" size for each user
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻣﺼﺮف‬
are brazed, or if the header wall has sufficient
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﻳﺎ در ﺻﻮرت ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﻧﺸﻌﺎب‬.‫ در روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ دﻳﻮاره‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻼك ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
‫ دهدرﺻﺪ اﻧﺸﻌﺎب ﺷﻴﺮدار و‬.‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫درﭘﻮش دار ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺼﺎرف آﺗﻲ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎم ﻃﻮل ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ از ﻣﻬﺮه‬
‫ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮره ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎل داﺧﻠﻲ در واﺣﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ )زﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ( در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ راﻫﻪ و ﺑﻪ‬
.‫دور از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮان‬
‫رﮔﻼﺗﻮر را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮد و ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺟﻬﺖ اﻋﻼم‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ در‬
thickness, threaded into the top of the header.
Each take-off shall be valved and provided
with nameplate to show service. Ten percent
spare valved and plugged take-offs shall be
provided for future use. Where more than one
panel section is required to make-up the panel
length, unions shall be provided on the header
between panel sections for interconnection in
the field. A valved drain connection (bottom
of header) is desirable at the end of the header
remote from the reducing stations. A header
pressure gage is also required so the
regulators can be adjusted, along with a
pressure switch to alarm a low header
26
‫ب( ﻫﺮ اﻧﺸﻌﺎب ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
.‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
pressure and a relief valve to protect against
overpressure.
‫ج( ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺴﻲ و ﻳﺎ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
c) Consideration shall be given to
prefabricated copper or aluminum sections
which can be purchased in sizes from 1" to 3"
with ¼-inch NPT taps and standard lengths of
1200 mm (special 2400 mm).
‫اﻳﻨﭻ‬
1
4
‫ اﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ‬3 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬1 ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را در اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ )ﻧﻮع‬1200 ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل و ﻃﻮل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬NPT
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺧﺮﻳﺪاري ﻧﻤﻮد‬2400 ‫ﺧﺎص‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻨﻬﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﻴﻮﺑﻬﺎي آب ﺟﻬﺖ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار داد‬
These can be assembled with copper watertube fittings for complete header make-up.
‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت داﺧﻠﻲ‬2-12-7
7.12.2 Interconnecting tubing
،‫ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت داﺧﻠﻲ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻳﻠﻮن‬،‫ آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‬،‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻲ از ﺑﺮﻧﺞ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻗﻄﺮ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Interconnecting tubing on the panel can be
copper, aluminum, or plastic with tubing fittings
of brass, aluminum, or nylon. Copper tubing,
when used, shall be ¼" OD with 1 mm wall
thickness, soft annealed. Aluminum tubing shall
be ¼" OD, 1 mm wall thickness, seamless
annealed aluminum alloy, ASTM B 210 Gr. 106
Temper O. The tubing shall be supported by
clamping to panel structure and shall be arranged
for access to instrument components.
‫ و از ﻧﻮع ﻧﺮم ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬1 ‫اﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره‬
1
4
‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬.‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪون درز و از آﻟﻴﺎژ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬1 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره‬، ‫اﻳﻨﭻ‬
1
4
ASTM B210 Gr.106 Temper O ‫آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﻴﺮه ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﻃﻮري ﻗﺮار‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺟﺰاء ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً داراي ﻛﺪ رﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از داﻛﺖ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻋﺒﻮر داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Plastic tubing should preferably be color coded.
It shall be run in plastic ducts with covers.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬3-12-7
7.12.3 Bulkhead connections
Control
and
transmission
lines
and
interconnecting lines between panels and field
shall be brought to bulkhead fittings.
‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﺧﻄﻮط اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و واﺣﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
The simplest form of bulkhead consists of a steel
plate with bulkhead fittings to join the tubing
from the field to the tubing from the panel
instruments. In a normal prefabricated panel, the
connections from or to the field instruments are
the only ones required to be made during
installation of the panel. Each bulkhead
connection shall be clearly labeled with the
designation of the particular instrument and
connection it serves. A take-off connection in the
piping from the bulkhead connection to the panel
instruments shall be considered for testing or for
future connection to a logging system or to other
instruments. 10 percent to 20 percent spare
bulkhead connections shall be considered for the
future addition of instruments.
‫ﺳﺎده ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ از ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ از واﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬،‫ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ واﺣﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﺗﺼﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر‬.‫زﻣﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫واﺿﺢ داراي ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﺎم اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ و اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل اﻧﺸﻌﺎب در ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل‬.‫ﻧﻈﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل آﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺛﺒﺎت و وﺳﺎﺋﻞ دﻳﮕﺮ اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ درﺻﺪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬20 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬10 .‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻫﺎي آﺗﻲ ادوات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
27
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬-8
8. ERGONOMIC DESIGN CONSIDERATION
8.1 Shared Visual Displays, Off-Workstation
‫ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬1-8
The requirements presented in this clause
concern the location of shared visual displays
within the control room. Many differing
technologies can be used for overview visual
displays, including banks of closed circuit
television (CCTV) monitors, hard-wired mimics
and static maps/diagrams. When designing
control room layouts for these differing
solutions, the constraints imposed by the various
solutions will need to be considered. Such
constraints include limitations on viewing angle,
contrast ratios and image construction. As an
alternative to large shared displays, the option of
presenting this information on the control
workstation, with smaller schematics, should be
considered.
‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻓﻦآوريﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك در ﻣﺤﺪوده اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ دﻳﺎﮔﺮاﻣﻬﺎ و‬،(CCTV) ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺪار ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ )ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ( و ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺷﺪه ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ در زﻣﺎن ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮاي راه ﺣﻠﻬﺎي‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎي وﺿﻮح و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ زاوﻳﻪ دﻳﺪ‬
،‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫اراﺋﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در روي اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
8.2 Horizontal and Vertical Viewing Distances
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ دﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ و ﻋﻤﻮدي‬2-8
.‫ﻣﻮارد ذﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
In particular, the following has to be taken into
account.
8.2.1 Where off-workstation visual displays
need to be used on a regular or continuous basis,
the preferred position is directly in front of the
control room operator such that they can easily
be seen when looking over the control
workstation or can be scanned by eye-movement
alone (see Figure 5).
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬1-2-8
،‫ﻛﺎري ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺪاوم ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ و ارﺟﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻮده ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي ﻛﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ از‬
‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﺎن‬
(.‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬5 ‫ )ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬-1
‫ ﻣﻴﺪان دﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬-2
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري‬-3
1. Operator
2. Horizontal visual field
3. Off-workstation visual display
Note: This plan view is intended to show general
principles
3
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دادن اﺻﻮل ﻛﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Fig. 5- PREFERRED LOCATION OF OFF-WORKSTATION VISUAL DISPLAYS
‫ – ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري‬5 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
28
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
8.2.2 Where the information presented on an offworkstation shared visual display does not have
to be read whilst operating the console, or
provides secondary information, the displays can
sometimes be mounted to one side of the control
workstation. Such displays should be positioned
so that all information required can be reliably
read, from the control room operator’s normal
position, by a simple rotation of the control
chair.
‫ در ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺧﺎرج از‬2-2-8
8.2.3 For very large off-workstation visual
displays, which need to be monitored on a
continual or regular basis, it is recommended that
control room operators be allocated sections of
the common display which they can effectively
and conveniently monitor.
‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬3-2-8
‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان در‬،‫اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در رده دوم ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي‬.‫ﻛﻨﺎر اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻗﺮار داد‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮدش ﺳﺎده ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﺰرگ ﺑﻮده و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ از ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎي اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺖ و ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
8.2.4 Where the information on an offworkstation overview visual display needs to be
regularly used by control room operators, the
design of the visual display and the layout of the
control room should ensure that all of the
information which needs to be used by a control
room operator can be seen from the normal
working position for both the vertical and
horizontal planes.
‫ در ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت روي ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از‬4-2-8
8.2.5 Necessary information presented on shared
overview visual displays shall be visible by
personnel, with applicable 5th to 95th percentile
body dimensions of the user population, from
their normal working positions (see annex B).
There can be a requirement for safety critical
information to be seen. Under these
circumstances, the user percentile range to be
accommodated may need to be greater.
‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺿﺮوري ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬5-2-8
‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎي اﺗﺎق‬
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ و ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ از ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﻛﺎري‬
.‫در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮدي و اﻓﻘﻲ دﻳﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮد و ﭘﻨﺞ درﺻﺪ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺪﻧﻲ از‬
‫ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ب( را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺤﺮاﻧﻲ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ دﻳﺪه‬.(‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺪوده در ﺻﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺗﺎق‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮل زﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
:‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Operational information presented on the lowest
part of an off-workstation visual display shall be
visible to a 5th percentile, seated, non-upright
control room operator.
The following formula may be used to determine
this measurement:
H i  H c  (D  d)
He  Hc
Dc  d
:‫ﻛﻪ در آن‬
Where:
.‫ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از آن ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان دﻳﺪ‬Hi
Hi is the lowest height at which the visual
display can be seen;
‫ اﻧﺪازه از ﻛﻒ ﺗﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬،‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ‬He
He is the design-eye-position, measured from the
29
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
floor to the outer corner of the eye; 5th percentile
shall be applied;
.‫ ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﭼﺸﻢ‬
Note: He is a combination of the adjusted seat
height and the anthropometric data of “eye
height, sitting” (see annex B).
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ اﺳﺖ از ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و‬He :‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
‫دادهﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﺻﻞ از اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي اﻋﻀﺎي ﺑﺪن ﺑﺮاي ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
.(‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﭼﺸﻢ‬
.‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Hc
Hc is the height of the console;
‫ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﺴﺖ از ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل و ﺳﻄﺢ‬D
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي دﻳﻮاري‬
D is the horizontal distance between the front
edge of the console and the surface of the wall
panel;
.‫ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Dc
Dc is the depth of the console;
d horizontal distance between the design-eyeposition and the front edge of the console.
‫ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﺴﺖ از ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ و ﻟﺒﻪ‬d
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬
For an explanation of the dimensions, see Figure
6.
.‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6 ‫ ﺷﻜﻞ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت در ﻣﻮرد اﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺷﻜﻞ‬
Key
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬-1
‫ ﺧﻂ دﻳﺪ‬-2
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ‬-3
1. Panel
2. Line of sight
3. Design-eye-position
Fig. 6- CONTROL WORKSTATION HIGHT AND VIEW OVER
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع وﭼﺸﻢ اﻧﺪاز اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-6 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note :
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ داده ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ داده ﻫﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺪن‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻧﺴﺎن در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ب( ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The appropriate data for the expected user
population should be applied; sample data are
presented in annex B.
30
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ‬3-8
8.3 Maintenance Access
In particular the following has to be taken into
account.
.‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
8.3.1 Space shall be allowed for maintenance
such that inadvertent activation of equipment or
systems is avoided.
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي‬1-3-8
8.3.2 Experience shows that items of equipment
housed on mimic panels should be mounted at
least 700 mm above the finished floor height for
reasons of visibility and access for maintenance.
‫ اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ ﺟﺎي‬،‫ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ‬2-3-8
8.3.3 Rear access to control workstations is
recommended, since it allows control staff to
continue their operations. Adequate clearance
behind the control workstation should be
allowed for a kneeling maintenance engineer to
work. Some suggested space provisions based on
world populations are presented as guidelines in
Figure 7.
‫ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬3-3-8
.‫ﻛﻪ از ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﺳﻬﻮي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻒ ﻗﺮار‬700 ‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ در ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ دﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮده و دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات اﻣﻜﺎن‬
.‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺧﻮد را اداﻣﻪ‬،‫ زﻳﺮا اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﭘﺸﺖ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬.‫دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﻛﻪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زاﻧﻮ زدن ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﻛﺎر اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﻨﻮع‬.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬7 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان راﻫﻨﻤﺎ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬،‫ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺟﺪا در اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬4-3-8
8.3.4 Off-workstation panels and displays
sometimes require maintenance access to the
rear. For such units, adequate space shall be
allowed for the larger maintenance technician
from the user population, 95th percentile (see
annex B) and consideration given to the use of
ladders and carrying of tool boxes.
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ واﺣﺪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻴﺴﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ ﻧﻮد و ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ‬،‫در ﻣﻴﺎن ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن‬
‫)ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( و در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﺮدﺑﺎن و‬
.‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺑﺰار ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺬول ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ اﻗﻼم ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ و ﺑﺰرگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ‬5-3-8
.‫ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ دارﻧﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ در‬،‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺑﻴﺮون اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
8.3.5 Where heavy or bulky items of equipment
need to be removed, the appropriate manual
handling guidelines should be consulted. It is
sometimes necessary to provide mechanical
assistance or hoist points.
Access to service ducts and serviced equipment
should, wherever practical, be from outside the
control room.
31
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
Key
‫ ﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻳﺴﺘﺎده‬-1
‫ ﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻤﻴﺪه‬-2
‫ ﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زاﻧﻮ زدن‬-3
‫ ﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ‬-4
‫ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول‬
.‫ب ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
1. Standing work position
2. Stooping work position
3. Kneeling work position
4. Squatting work position
See Table 2 and annex B for further details on
dimensions.
Fig. 7- MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE OF CONTROL PANELS
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-7‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
32
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
TABLE 2- MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND ALLOWANCES THAT
NEED TO BE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION
‫ – ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻻزم و ﻣﺠﺎز ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
Dimension a
Minimum space requirements (mm)
Allowances to be taken into consideration
‫اﺑﻌﺎد‬
(‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻻزم )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﺠﺎز ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
1 910
for largest maintenance technician p95b
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
A
30
for shoes
700
for largest maintenance technician P95
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻔﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
B
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
760
for largest maintenance technician P95
C
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
1500
for largest maintenance technician P95
D
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
760
for largest maintenance technician P95
E
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
1370
for largest maintenance technician P95
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
F
30
for shoes
760
for largest maintenance technician P95
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻔﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
G
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
1220
for largest maintenance technician P95
H
p95b ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات‬
a. These dimensions in Table 2 relate to
alternative postures adopted for maintenance
and are illustrated in Figure 7.
‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬2 ‫اﻟﻒ( اﻳﻦ اﺑﻌﺎد در ﺟﺪول‬
b. P95: 95th percentile of the expected user
population.
‫ ﻧﻮد و ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ از ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬:P95 ( ‫ب‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬7 ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﺑﻮده و در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
. ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن‬
Note: The table above covers the whole world
population. Where available, equivalent user
population data should be used.
.‫ ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق ﺗﻤﺎم ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎن را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
8.4 General Principles for Environmental
Design
‫ اﺻﻮل ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬4-8
The following nine general ergonomic principles
shall be followed for good environmental design.
‫ اﺻﻞ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻴﻜﻲ ذﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺧﻮب‬9
. ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻮدن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
33
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
Note 1: It is important to recognize that design
features related to one particular environmental
principle can have an impact on other principles.
‫ ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي‬: 1 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Principle 1: Operator task demands and comfort
shall be the primary focus when designing
control centre environments.
‫ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري و آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﺻﻠﻲ در‬: 1 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Principle 2: In order to optimize operator’s
performance and comfort, levels of illumination
as well as temperature shall be adjustable in
accordance with the operator’s needs.
،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ و آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬: 2 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Principle 3: Where conflicting demands exist
between different environmental features (i.e.
thermal conditions, air quality, lighting,
acoustics, vibration, and interior design and
aesthetics), a balance shall be sought which
favors operational needs.
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬: 3 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﺻﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ روي ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺻﻮل اﺛﺮ ﮔﺬار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ دﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ ﻧﻮر‬،‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﻮا‬،‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻟﺮزش و ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺎدﻟﻲ را‬،‫ﺻﺪا‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻔﻊ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Note 2: One way to achieve this would be to
consult experts in human factors and ergonomics
with the aim of identifying optimal compromises
between conflicting demands, e.g. to design a
lighting system in which old and new equipment
work in parallel in upgraded control centers.
‫ ﻣﺸﺎوره‬،‫ ﻳﻜﻲ از روﺷﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺎدل‬: 2 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Principle 4: External factors providing
operational information (e.g. security views,
weather conditions) shall be taken into account
when designing the control centre.
‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ را اراﺋﻪ‬: 4 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎن در ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ اﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ و ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪف ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻫﻤﮕﺮاﺋﻲ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ و ﺟﺪﻳﺪ در ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻪ ارﺗﻘﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮازات ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻫﻮا( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ﻣﻲدﻫﻨﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ دﻳﺪ ﮔﺎهﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺮاﻛﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
Principle 5: Environmental factors work in
combination and shall be taken into account in a
holistic way, i.e. the whole environmental entity
needs to be taken into account, (e.g. interaction
between air conditioning systems generating
noise and the acoustic environment).
‫ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬: 5 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Principle 6: Environmental design shall be used
to mitigate the detrimental effects of shift work,
e.g. raising ambient air temperature in the early
morning.
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻦ از اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬: 6 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Note 3: A complementary approach would be to
consider improved shift work schedules.
‫ ﻳﻚ اﻗﺪام ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺟﺪول‬: 3 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Principle 7: The design of environmental
systems shall take account of future change (e.g.
equipment, workstation layouts, and work
organization).
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات آﺗﻲ را‬: 7 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﻳﺖ‬.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺎﻣﻊ و ﻛﻠﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ واﻗﻊ ﮔﺮدد )ﻣﺜﻼً واﻛﻨﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي‬
.(‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﻪ‬،‫زﻳﺎن ﺑﺎر ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻧﻮﺑﺖ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫در اﺑﺘﺪاي ﺻﺒﺢ‬
.‫ﻧﻮﺑﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي‬،‫ﻧﻴﺰ در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.(‫ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺎزﻣﺎن ﻛﺎري‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺪف ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ در ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف‬: 4 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 4: This can be done by designing for
flexibility (location of lighting, ventilation ducts,
etc.). Another possible measure would be to
‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا و‬،‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد )ﻣﺤﻞ ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎ‬
‫ اﻗﺪام اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻘﺪار ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬.(‫ﻏﻴﺮه‬
34
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
reserve extra capacity in the environmental
systems.
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Principle 8: The quality of the working
environment shall be an integral part of the
overall design process for control centers, as
shown in Figure 1.
‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻛﻞ روﻧﺪ‬: 8 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Note 5: The steps presented in Figure 1 are part
of a wider process discussed in ISO 11064-1
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ‬1 ‫ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﺷﻜﻞ‬: 5 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Principle 9: An iterative and multi-disciplinary
design approach shall be taken in order to
achieve an appropriate balance between
buildings, equipment and the control centre
environment. This approach shall be checked
and evaluated as the design develops.
،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﺎدل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬: 9 ‫اﺻﻞ‬
Note 6: This approach is necessary because most
building and equipment design features have a
potential impact on the design of the control
centre environment. For example, the heat
dissipation of lighting equipment can affect an
air conditioning system.
‫ زﻳﺮا اﻏﻠﺐ ﺟﻨﺒﻪﻫﺎي‬،‫ اﻳﻦ روﻳﻜﺮد ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬: 6 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن‬1 ‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
.‫داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻮرد‬ISO 11064-1 ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮده ﺗﺮي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ روﻳﻜﺮد‬
‫ در ﺧﻼل ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ و‬.‫ﺗﻜﺮاري و ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ اﻳﻦ روﻳﻜﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ارزش ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات داراي ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺛﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﮔﺬاري روي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫دﻓﻊ ﺣﺮارت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
35
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
36
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ ‪April 2010/ 1389‬‬
‫)‪IPS-G-IN-220(1‬‬
‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺧﺎص‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫روشﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬
‫اﻫﺪاف‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫اﻫﺪاف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ اوﻟﻴﻪ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺪود ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل‬
‫ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫اﻫﺪاف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮه‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
‫آﻳﺎ از ﻧﻈﺮ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺒﻮل اﺳﺖ ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪور ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺪارك ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪Fig. 8- OVERALL PROCESS FOR CONTROL ROOM ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -8‬ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫‪37‬‬
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان‬-9
9. PAGING
‫ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ و ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
،‫ذﻳﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ زﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
The following technical and operational
characteristics of the systems. stations and
equipment for land mobile radio-paging should
be adopted for systems intended for international
use.
9.1
Operational
Characteristics
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
and
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ‬1-9
System
‫ اﺻﻮل ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬1-1-9
9.1.1 Design principles
The radio-paging system should be designed as
an extension of the telecommunications
networks taking into account the limitations due
to one-way transmission on the radio path.
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮح ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ اي‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ارﺳﺎل ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم در ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
9.1.2 Receiver operation when changing
paging zones
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮاﻧﻲ‬2-1-9
The procedure by which a user can obtain
service when moving from one paging zone or
system to another (even internationally), should
be as simple as possible. Manual adjustment of
the receiver should not be required.
‫روش ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ )ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﺳﺘﻲ‬.‫ﺑﻴﻦاﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﻘﺪور ﺳﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬3-1-9
9.1.3 Messages
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
‫ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ رﻗﻤﻲ و ﺣﺮﻓﻲ‬،‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬. ‫را ارﺳﺎل و درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ اﻧﻮاع ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻧﻮاع وﺳﻴﻌﻲ از ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه )ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻮن( ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ رﻗﻤﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫دﻳﮕﺮي از ﭘﻴﺎم ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﺪ )رﻣﺰ( ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي داده‬
‫ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻃﻮل‬-‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي رﻗﻤﻲ‬.‫ﺷﻔﺎف را ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ده ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻫﺰار ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮ‬
‫ ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد و اﻧﺪازه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﻃﻮل اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ را ﻣﺤﺪود ﺳﺎزد‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم داده ﻫﺎي ﺷﻔﺎف ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬.‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ارﺳﺎﻟﻲ در ﻣﺴﻴﺮ رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮاﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
.‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
The system should enable the transmission and
reception of additional messages of different
types, such as the telephone number of the caller
or longer numeric or alpha-numeric messages. It
should be possible to use different types of
receivers for different types of messages.
A large variety of messages should be possible,
including pre-defined messages, (e.g. tone-only
messages), long alphanumeric messages or any
other type of coded messages using full
transparent data capability. For numeric
messages the length is typically some tens of
numeric characters. For alphanumeric messages
the typical length could be between some tens of
characters up to several thousands of characters.
The type of the application and the size of the
display associated with the receiver may limit
the possible length of the messages. As far as
transparent data messages are concerned. the
same limitation may apply. This limitation is
also tied to the transmission capacity on the
radio path of such a paging system.
38
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي اوﻟﻮﻳﺖدار‬4-1-9
9.1.4 Priority calls
‫اﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
،‫ﻃﺒﻖ اﺷﺘﺮاك ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ( داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺧﺎرج از ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫)اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺎ آن ﻗﺮارداد اﻣﻀﺎء ﻛﺮده( در‬
.‫دﺳﺘﺮس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
Although it may be possible to have users that
are given priority (higher or lower) according to
the chosen subscription, this facility may not be
available outside the home network (the
operator network with which a subscriber has
signed a subscription).
‫ ﻛﺪ اﻋﻄﺎء ﻣﺠﻮز‬5-1-9
9.1.5 Authorization codes
It should be possible for subscribers who so
wish, to have authorization codes that have to be
used by the caller when calling such a
subscriber.
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ داراي ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه در زﻣﺎن‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮاري ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
Authorization codes may be required by the
network operator for a customer to access some
supplementary services. e.g. priority call.
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻮز ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دار‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ‬6-1-9
9.1.6 Group calls
It should be possible to call several subscribers
as group.
‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
9.1.7 Receiver identification
‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه‬7-1-9
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر اﻧﺤﺼﺎري در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻠﻲ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ دو ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه اي‬
‫ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Each receiver should be identified uniquely in
the system in which it is to operate. Where
administrations combine national systems to give
international service, they should ensure that no
two receivers used for this purpose have the
same identity, except when required for group
calling.
‫ روش ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ در اﻧﺮژي‬8-1-9
9.1.8 Battery saving techniques
،‫از آﻧﺠﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺼﺮف اﻧﺮژي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ روﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ در ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
As low power consumption is essential for the
receiver, the system should include methods for
battery saving.
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬2-9
9.2 Control Centre Characteristics
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬1-2-9
9.2.1 Function
The control centre should perform the store and
forward functions for paging calls for national
and international service.
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي و ارﺳﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻠﻲ و ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ را ﺑﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
The control center is linked with other control
centers of paging operator networks through a
standardized interface in order to provide
international service. The control center is
connected also with the access networks through
interfaces from which it receives paging
messages. These interfaces should follow the
appropriate ITU- T Recommendations according
to the type of access network.
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ راﺑﻂ‬
-‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮﺳﻂ راﺑﻂ‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ارﺗﺒﺎط اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﻮده و از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ راﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ‬.‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان را درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬ITU-T ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻧﻮع ﺷﺒﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬
39
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﺷﺒﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬2-2-9
9.2.2 Access network signals
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﺧﻮان دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻮع دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗﻲ را ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ و‬
‫اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻠﻲ و ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
The control centre is connected to different
telecommunication networks which allow
originators to access the paging system. These
telecom networks are called access networks
and are chosen by each network operator
according to the type of access offered to the
customer. The control centre therefore has to
accept and generate telecommunication
networks signals agreed for national and
international networks.
40
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
Recommendations for Environmental Design
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.1 General
‫ارﻗﺎم اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺧﺎص‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮوژه اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻴﻜﻲ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The figures in this annex are presented for
general guidance only. For each control-room
project, the specific ergonomic requirements
associated with the operators’ tasks need to be
addressed for the selection of the most
appropriate values. Specialist advice should be
sought where needed.
‫ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬2-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.2 Thermal Environment
‫ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ذﻳﻞ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﺑﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ISO 7730 ‫اﺳﺎس اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
The following values, here presented as
recommendations, are based on requirements
given in ISO 7730.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻃﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
a) For Sedentary Activity During Winter
Conditions:
: ‫زﻣﺴﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
1) the operative temperature should be
between 20 0C and 24 0C (i.e. 22 0C± 2 0C);
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬24 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬20 ‫( دﻣﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬1
2) the vertical air temperature difference
between 1.1 m and 0.1 m above floor (head
and ankle level) should be less than 3 0C;
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ و‬1/1 ‫( ﺗﻔﺎوت دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮا در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﻴﻦ‬2
3) the surface temperature of the floor
should normally be between 19 0C and 26
0
C, but floor heating systems can be
designed for 29 0C ;
26 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬19 ‫( دﻣﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ در ﻛﻒ اﺗﺎق ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻴﻦ‬3
(‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬22±2 ‫ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
3 ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻒ )ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺮ و زاﻧﻮ ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬0/1
.‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸـﻲ ﻛﻒ‬
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬29 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬
4) the mean air velocity should be less
than 0.15 m/s;
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬0/15 ‫( ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬4
5) the radiant temperature asymmetry
from windows or other cold vertical
surfaces should be less than 10 0C (in
relation to a small vertical plane 0.6 m
above the floor);
‫( دﻣﺎي ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﺎرن از ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬5
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬10 ‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺳﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي‬0/6 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
(‫ﻛﻒ‬
6) the relative humidity should be between
30 % and 70 %.
‫ درﺻﺪ‬70 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬30 ‫( ﻣﻴﺰان رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬6
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ب( ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻃﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
b) For Sedentary Activity During Summer
Conditions:
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬26 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬23 ‫( دﻣﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬1
1) the operative temperature should be
between 23 0C and 26 0C (i.e. 24.5 0C± 1.5
0
C);
( ‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬24/5 ± 1/5 ‫)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
41
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
0/1 ‫ و‬1/1 ‫( ﺗﻔﺎوت دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮا در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﻴﻦ‬2
2) the vertical air temperature difference
between 1.1 m and 0.1 m above floor (head
and ankle level) should be less than 3 0C
‫ درﺟﻪ‬3 ‫)ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺮ و زاﻧﻮ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬.‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﻒ‬
.‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
3) the mean air velocity should be less than
0.15 m/s;
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬0/15 ‫( ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬3
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
4) the relative humidity should be between
30 % and 70 %.
.‫ درﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬70 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬30 ‫( ﻣﻴﺰان رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬4
c) Control room operators should be able to
increase control room temperatures by 1 0C to
2 0C in the early hours of the morning to
compensate for diurnal rhythms.
‫ج( اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎي اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ دﻣﺎي اﺗﺎق‬
d) In order to limit thermal shock to people
moving between the inside and outside of the
control room, consideration should be given
to buffer zones which offer an intermediate
temperature.
‫د( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ در ﺷﻮك ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
e) Where maintenance staff and others are
expected to work for extended periods in
equipment rooms, appropriate attention
should be given to their needs concerning
thermal and lighting requirements.
‫ﻫ( ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬1 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار‬
.‫اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﺒﺮان ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات روزاﻧﻪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﺣﺎل ﺗﺮدد داﺧﻞ و ﺧﺎرج اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي واﺳﻄﻪاي ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ را دارﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ در اﺗﺎق ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دارﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺎز آﻧﻬﺎ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ و ﻧﻮر ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﻮا‬3-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.3 Air Quality
The control room should be supplied with
outdoor air in sufficient quantities to dilute
internally generated pollutants.
‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻫﻮاي ﺧﺎرج ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ رﻗﻴﻖ‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮاد آﻻﻳﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه در داﺧﻞ اﺗﺎق اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
Note. The UK Health and Safety Executive
considers that current guidelines of 8 l/s (29
m3/h) of outdoor air supply per person is
sufficient for a no-smoking environment.
،‫ ﻣﻘﺮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و ﺳﻼﻣﺖ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺮﻣﻜﻌﺐ در‬29) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬8 ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎي ﺟﺎري ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﻫﻮاي ﺧﺎرج ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮد را در ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﺎري از‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل دﺧﺎﻧﻴﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻏﻠﻈﺖ دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در زﻣﺎن اﺷﻐﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ در‬910‫ ﮔﺮم در ﻣﺘﺮﻣﻜﻌﺐ )ﻣﺴﺎوي‬1/8 ‫اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮن( ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
Carbon dioxide concentrations should not exceed
1.8 g/m3 [= 910 ppm] when the control room is
at full occupancy.
‫ روﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬4-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.4 Lighting
a) Illuminance levels on work surfaces where
paperwork is undertaken should be
“maintained” at a level of 200 lx to 750 lx
with an upper limit of 500 lx where VDUs are
used; this can be a combination of ambient
and task lighting.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻴﺰان روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻪ در آن ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬
b) Dimming should be provided with a lower
limit of “maintained” 200 lx on the work
surface at all times.
‫ب( ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﺪه در‬
750 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬200 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻄﺢ‬،‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻨﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﻜﺎر‬VDU ‫ ﻟﻮﻛﺲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬500 ‫ﻟﻮﻛﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺪت روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از‬.‫رﻓﺘﻪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻧﻮر ﻣﺤﻴﻂ و ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻛﺲ روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎم اوﻗﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬200 ‫ﻣﻘﺪار‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
42
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
c) For working areas where mainly
paperwork is undertaken, an illumination
level of 500 lx should be maintained.
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ج( ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻛﺲ‬500 ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮔﺮدد‬
d) Electric lighting should achieve a glare
index (UGR) of 19 or less for all work
positions.
‫د( روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺿﺮﻳﺐ درﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
e) Lamps with a general colour-rendering
index of over 80 should be used.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬80 ‫ﻫ( ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ رﻧﮓ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
f) High-frequency control gear should be used
to avoid flicker.
‫و( ﺟﻬﺖ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ و ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬19 UGR
.‫ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ز( در ﺣﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات داراي وﺳﺎﺋﻞ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮرد‬
g) Where self-illuminated equipment is used,
its contrast ratio to the immediate surrounds
should not exceed 3:1 and its contrast ratio to
the peripheral parts of the visual field should
not exceed 10:1.
‫ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ و اﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬1 ‫ ﺑﻪ‬3 ‫اﻃﺮاف ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺪان دﻳﺪ اﻃﺮاف ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ ﺑﻪ‬10
h) The average luminance of luminaries and
bright room surfaces should not exceed 1 000
cd/m2 for class I and class II screens, and
should not exceed 200 cd /m2 for class III
screens.
‫ح( ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ و ﺳﻄﻮح روﺷﻦ‬
i) For direct lighting the following maximum
luminary luminance should be followed:
‫ط( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ذﻳﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬
‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻄﻮح ﻛﻼس‬1000 ‫اﺗﺎق ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار‬III ‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﺮده و در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﻄﻮح ﻛﻼس‬II ‫ و‬I
.‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬200 ‫از‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎت ﮔﺮدد‬
Screen type
Maximum luminance where some
negative polarity software used
‫ﻧﻮع ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺪت روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ و ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ روﺷﻦ‬
Types I and II
(good or moderate screen treatment)
1 000 cd/m2
(‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮب ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬II ‫ و‬I ‫اﻧﻮاع‬
‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬1000
Type III
(no screen treatment)
200 cd/m2
(‫ )ﺑﺪون ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬III ‫اﻧﻮاع‬
NOTE :
‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬200
Based on ISO 9241-6.
ISO 9241- 6‫ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
:‫ي( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
j) For indirect lighting:
- The average luminance on the ceiling, or
other surfaces lit directly, should not exceed
500 cd/m2;
‫ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر روي ﺳﻘﻒ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬-
- The peak luminance should not exceed 1
500 cd/m2;
‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬1500 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬-
- The luminance should vary gradually
across the surfaces being directly lit.
‫ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﻲ در ﻃﻮل ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻪ‬-
‫ ﺷﻤﻊ ﺑﺮ‬500 ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫زﻳﺎدﺗﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
43
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬5-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.5 Acoustic Environment
The ambient noise in the control room should
not exceed 45 dB LAeq,T. The background level
should be in the range 30 dB to 35 dB LAeq,T,
to maintain a degree of aural privacy, obtained
by reducing the signal-to-noise ratio in the area
in question. It is generally considered that
ambient noise levels should not be less than 30
dB (A-weighted).
LAeq is pressure level measurement parameter.
Full form of LAeq is " Equivalent continuous Aweighted sound pressure level". It is widely used
around the world as an index for noise.
Where:
‫ دﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﺎوز‬45 ‫ﺻﺪاي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
،‫ دﺳﻲﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬35 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬30 ‫ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﺪوده‬.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﺎ درﺟﻪاي از ﮔﻮش ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
.‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
30 ‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻄﻮح ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫دﺳﻲﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮح ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬.‫ ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬LAeq
"‫ "ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪاي داراي وزن ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﺎدل‬LAeq
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺴﺘﺮده ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻧﻮﻳﺰ در‬.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎم دﻧﻴﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
LAeq = 10*log[1/(t2-t1) * Integration of (P2A/P20) between interval [t1 t2]]
:‫ﻛﻪ در آن‬
LAeq = equivalent continuous A-weighted sound
pressure level [dB]
p0 = reference pressure level = 20µPa
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا داراي وزن ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﺎدل )دﺳﻲ‬: LAeq
(‫ﺑﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻜﺮو ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎل‬20 = ‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬:p0
(‫ ﻓﺸﺎر داراي وزن ) ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎل‬: pA
(‫ زﻣﺎن ﺷﺮوع اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ) ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬:t1
(‫ زﻣﺎن ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬:t2
‫ دﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي‬10 ً‫ﻫﺸﺪارﻫﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫زﻣﻴﻨﻪ در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﻴﺪن ﮔﺮدد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ دﺳﻲﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺮاس‬15 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي‬.‫ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻧﮕﺮدﻳﺪه و در ﺻﺤﺒﺖ اﻓﺮاد اﺛﺮﮔﺬار ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﺮده و‬0/75 ‫ﻃﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺎق‬.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/4 ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز‬.‫دارد‬
pA= A-weighted pressure [Pa]
t1 = start time for measurement [s]
t2 = end time for measurement [s]
Auditory alarms should be approximately 10 dB
above the background sound spectrum of the
control room in order to be audible, and less than
15 dB higher than the background to avoid
startling
staff
and
affecting
speech
communication. Mid-frequency reverberation
times should not exceed 0.75 s and should
preferably be closer to 0.4 s — dependent on
room. Specialist advice should be sought if
required.
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‬6 -‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.6 Interior Design
‫در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮاد و ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺎق‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
In selecting materials and finishes for the control
areas the following should be considered.
a) The reflectance value of the floor finishes
should be between 0.2 and 0.3.
0/3 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬0/2 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻘﺪار اﻧﻌﻜﺎس ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
b) Wall finishes should have a surface
reflectance of between 0.50 and 0.60. The
surface reflectance value should not fall
below 0.50, as values below this can increase
the contrast between the ceiling and walls,
contribute to a gloomy environment, and
increase electric light power consumption.
‫ب( رﻧﮓ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ دﻳﻮارﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي اﻧﻌﻜﺎس ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮدد‬0/5 ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻧﻌﻜﺎس ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/6 ‫ و‬0/5
‫زﻳﺮا ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ وﺿﻮح ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ دﻳﻮار‬
‫ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻘﻒ را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻴﺮه ﮔﺸﺘﻪ‬
.‫و ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮق روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
44
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ج(ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ ﺑﺮاق و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎن‬
c) The glazing bars and solid areas of the
partitions should have a similar reflectance
value (0.5 to 0.6) to the periphery walls.
‫( ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ دﻳﻮارﻫﺎي اﻃﺮاف را‬./6‫ ﺗﺎ‬./5) ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻧﻌﻜﺎس‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
d) Where indirect lighting systems are used,
ceilings should be white, should be of matt
finish and should have a minimum surface
reflectance of 0.8.
‫د( در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ و از رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎت ﺑﻮده و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬.‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/8 ‫اﻧﻌﻜﺎس ﺳﻄﺢ‬
45
April 2010/ 1389 ‫ﻓﺮوردﻳﻦ‬
APPENDIX B
(Anthropometric Data of The World
Population)
Human body measurementsa
‫اﻟﻒ‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺪن اﻧﺴﺎن‬
Stature (body height)
(‫ﻗﺪ و ﻗﺎﻣﺖ )ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺪن اﻧﺴﺎن‬
IPS-G-IN-220(1)
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ب‬
(‫)اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺪن در ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎن‬
P5b
mm
P95c
mm
1390
1910
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ‬
740
1000
Eye height, sitting ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ‬،‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﭼﺸﻢ‬
620
880
320
500
285
430
Hip breadth (standing)(‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﺳﻦ)اﻳﺴﺘﺎده‬
260
410
Knee height
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﺎ زاﻧﻮ‬
405
600
Lower leg length (popliteal height)
(‫ﻃﻮل ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﭘﺎ )ارﺗﻔﺎع ﭘﺲ زاﻧﻮ‬
320
505
Elbow-grip length
‫ﻃﻮل ﻛﺸﻴﺪن آرﻧﺞ‬
270
410
Buttock-knee length
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎﺳﻦ ﺗﺎ زاﻧﻮ‬
450
670
Buttock-heel length
‫ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎﺳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ‬
830
1190
Hip breadth (sitting) (‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺑﺎﺳﻦ)ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ‬
260
440
Foot length
200
300
Sitting height
d
Shoulder breadth (bideltoid)
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺷﺎﻧﻪ‬
Shoulder breadth (bi-acromial)
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي ﺷﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﭘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺗﺎا‬
a. Source: Hans W. Jürgens, Ivar A. Aune,
Ursula
Pieper:
International
data
on
anthropometry, Occupational safety and health
series No.65, published by the International
labour office, Geneva, Switzerland.
:‫ اون ﺑﺎ اورﺳﻮﻻ ﭘﻴﭙﺮ‬،‫ اﻳﻮار‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻧﺲ دﺑﻠﻴﻮ ﺟﻮرﮔﻦ‬:‫اﻟﻒ( ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
b. P5: 5th percentile (represents the physical size
drawn from the “small type” population, i.e. only
5%of the values lie below this lower limiting
value).
‫ ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ )ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬: P5 (‫ب‬
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬،‫داده ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺪن اﻧﺴﺎن‬
‫ اﻧﺘﺸﺎرات اداره ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬65 ‫ ﺳﺮي ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ﻛﺎر و ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
.‫ ﺳﻮﻳﺲ‬،‫ ژﻧﻮ‬،‫ﻛﺎر‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬5 ‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬،‫از ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ رﻳﺰ اﻧﺪام‬
.(‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ‬
c. P95: 95 percentile (represents the physical size
drawn from the “large type” population, i.e. only
5%of the values lie above this upper limiting
value).
‫ ﻧﻮد و ﭘﻨﺠﻤﻴﻦ درﺻﺪ )ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي‬: P95 (‫ج‬
d. As an approximation, this measure is to be
used for “elbow to elbow” dimension if no
figures are available for the user population. The
“elbow to elbow” width is the maximum breadth
of the seated body, at elbow level, with the upper
arms hanging vertically and the hands resting on
the upper thighs.
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﺑﻌﺎد"آرﻧﺞ ﺗﺎ‬،‫د( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬
Note: The table above covers the whole world
population. Where available, equivalent user
population data should be used.
‫ در‬.‫ ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎن اﺳﺖ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
‫ درﺻﺪ اﻧﺪازه‬5 ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه از ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ درﺷﺖ اﻧﺪام ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
.(‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫آرﻧﺞ" ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد اﮔﺮ رﻗﻢ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
‫ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي "آرﻧﺞ " ﺗﺎ "آرﻧﺞ" ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻬﻨﺎي‬. ‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻋﻤﻮدي‬،‫ﺑﺪن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ در ﺳﻄﺢ آرﻧﺞ‬
.‫آوﻳﺰان و دﺳﺘﻬﺎ در روي ران ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ آﻣﺎر و ارﻗﺎم ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
46